DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION...WM2A Project # 2016-24 Henry Burns Park WM2A Architects Oct....

WM2A Project # 2016-24 Henry Burns Park

WM2A Architects Oct. 20, 2016 TOC - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 00 0015 - LIST OF DRAWINGS

SECTION 00 0020 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

SECTION 00 0030 - PROPOSAL

SECTION 00 0050 - AGREEMENT

SECTION 00 0060 - GUARANTY BONDS

SECTION 00 0100 - GENERAL CONDITIONS

SECTION 00 0120 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY

SECTION 01 2100 - ALLOWANCES

SECTION 01 2200 - UNIT PRICES

SECTION 01 2300 - ALTERNATES

SECTION 01 2500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 2600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

SECTION 01 3200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 7300 - EXECUTION

SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

SECTION 01 7823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

SECTION 01 7839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

SECTION 01 7900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

SECTION 02 4119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

SECTION 04 2000 - UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 05 - METALS

SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 05 5213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS



DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

SECTION 09 9113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

SECTION 10 1423 - PANEL SIGNAGE

SECTION 10 1426 – EXTERIOR SIGN

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

SECTION 11 6813 - PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT

PLAY EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

SECTION 12 9300 - SITE FURNISHINGS

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

NOT APPLICABLE



DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

26 0500

26 0501

26 0519

26 0526

26 0533

26 0553

26 2200

26 2410

26 2416

26 2726

26 2813

26 2816

26 5100

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRIC

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

SERVICE ENTRANCE

PANELBOARDS

WIRING DEVICES

FUSES

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

EXTERIOR LIGHTING -LIGHT FIXTURES

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

SECTION 31 1111 - SITE CLEARING

SECTION 31 2300 – EARTHWORK

SECTION 31 2500 – EROSION SILTATION AND DUST CONTROL

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

SECTION 32 1313 - CONCRETE PAVING, SIDEWALKS & CURB AND GUTTERS

SECTION 32 1823 – TENNIS COURT SURFACE COLOR COATING SYSTEM

SECTION 32 8400 – IRRIGATION SYSTEM

SECTION 32 9000 - LANDSCAPE WORK

SECTION 32 9210 - TURF AND LANDSCAPE AREAS

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

SECTION 33 1116 - SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION

SECTION 33 4116 - STORM DRAINAGE



DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 35 - WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTEGRATION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 42 - PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION AND

STORAGE EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 44 - POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 45 - INDUSTRY-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 48 - ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 99 - NARRATIVES

NOT APPLICABLE


WM2A Architects October 20, 2015 000015 - 1

SECTION 00 0015 - LIST OF DRAWINGS

DRAWING LIST

G0-1 COVER/INDEX

C1-0 SITE SURVEY

C1-1 SITE DEMOLITION PLAN

C1-2 SITE GRADING PLAN

C1-3 SITE STAKING PLAN

C1-4 DRIVES AND SIDEWALK PLAN

C2-1 NEW WORK ENLARGED PLAN-ONE

C2-2 NEW WORK ENLARGED PLAN-TWO

C2-3 NEW WORK ENLARGED PLAN-THREE

C3-1 ENLARGED PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT PLAN AND DETAILS

C3-2 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT IMAGES

EC1-1 INITIAL STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN

EC1-2 FINAL STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN

EC1-3 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION DETAILS

C7-1 SITE IMPROVEMENT DETAILS



SL1-1 SITE LIGHTING PLAN

L1-1 LANDSCAPE PLAN – 1 AND SCHEDULE

L1-2 LANDSCAPE PLAN – 2



L2-1 LANDSCAPE DETAILS

I1-1 IRRIGATION PLAN

I1-2 IRRIGATION DETAILS

END OF SECTION 00 0015


WM2A Architects Oct. 20, 2016 000020 - 1

SECTION 00 0020 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. All definitions set forth in the Section 00 0100 - General Conditions of the Contract for

Construction, are applicable to these Instructions to Bidders.

B. Bidding documents include these specifications, the form of proposal, the contract

drawings and any addenda issued prior to receipt of bid.

C. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the

Contract which modify or interpret the bidding documents by deletion, additions,

clarifications or corrections. Addenda will become part of the Contract Documents

when the Construction Contract is executed.

1.2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION

A. Each bidder, by making his bid, represents that he read and understands the bidding

documents.

B. Each bidder, by making his bid, represents that he has visited the site and familiarized

himself with the local conditions under which the work is to be performed.

1.3 DOCUMENT DISCREPANCIES

A. Should the bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from the documents, he shall at

once notify the Architect. Requests for Interpretations of Drawings and Specifications

shall be made in writing to the Architect not later than five (5) days prior to receipt of

proposals. Any subsequent instructions to bidders will be issued in the form of

addenda to the specifications, and sent to the bidder. All addenda will be enumerated

in the Proposal Form. Neither Owner nor Architect will be responsible for any oral

instructions.

1.4

BIDDING PROCEDURES

.



1.5 BIDDING DOCUMENTS

A. DOCUMENT PROCUREMENT: Contract documents may be obtained from the

Architect in pdf format. Printing expenses are the responsibility of the bidder.

1.6 CONTRACT AWARD

A. Contract, if awarded will be on a Lump Sum basis. No bid may be withdrawn for a

period of 90 days after time has been called on date of bid opening. A bid bond, made

payable to the owner, in amount not less than 5% of the lump sum bid must

accompany bids. Both a Performance and Payment Bond will be required in an

amount equal to 100% of the contract price.

1.7 REJECTION OF BIDS

A. The bidder acknowledges the right of the Owner to reject any or all bids and to waive

any informality or irregularity in any bid received. In addition, the bidder recognizes

the right of the Owner to reject a bid if the bidder failed to furnish any required bid

security, or to submit the data required by the bidding documents, or if the bid is in any

way incomplete or irregular.

1.8 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES

A. Any alternates accepted will not necessarily be accepted in the order listed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)




SECTION 000030 - PROPOSAL WM2A Architects

348 Cotton Avenue, Suite 500

P.O. Box 110

Macon, Georgia 3l201

Re: HENRY BURNS PARK

Gentlemen:

Having carefully examined the Project Specifications entitled "PROJECT MANUAL for

Renovation to the Henry Burns Park”, drawings of the same title and Addenda

Nos.

as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, the undersigned proposes to furnish all

services, labor and materials called for by them for the entire work in accordance with said

documents for the sum of:

$ Dollars

($ )

which sum is hereinafter call the “Contract Sum".

Alternate 1: Delete from bid__$________________________________________Dollars



The undersigned agrees to commence actual physical work on the site with an adequate work

force and equipment within ten (10) days of a date to be specified in a written "Notice to

Proceed" order. Length of contract time shall be as indicated below and represent the

consecutive calendar days from and including date indicated on Notice to Proceed order to date of

Substantial Completion for each phase of construction. Substantial Completion date shall be as

defined in AIA B201 General Conditions. No allowances for time extension shall be accepted,

except for delays caused by extreme weather conditions in excess of the normal average as

established by NOAA for the Bibb County, GA area.

Total calendar days

It is hereby understood and agreed that the OWNER has the right to reject any or all bids and to

waive any informality or irregularity in any bid received.

Unit Prices:

Removal and replacement of unsuitable soils: $ per cu.ft.



For and in consideration of the sum of $1.00, the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, the

undersigned agrees that this proposal may not be revoked or withdrawn after the time set for the

opening of bids but shall remain open for acceptance for a period of thirty (30) days following

such time.

In case he is notified in writing by mail, telegraph, or delivery of the acceptance of this proposal

within thirty (30) days after the time set for the opening of bids, the undersigned agrees to execute

within ten (10) days a contract AIA STANDARD AGREEMENT AND GENERAL

CONDITIONS BETWEEN OWNER AND the GENERAL CONTACTOR, 2015 for the work

for the above stated compensation and at the same time to furnish and deliver to the Owner a

Performance Bond and a Payment Bond in accordance with the forms referenced in Section

00060. Guaranty Bonds shall be in an amount equal to 100% of the contract sum.

The names of all persons interested in the foregoing bid as principals are:

Respectfully submitted,

(IMPORTANT NOTICE: If the bidder or other interested person is a corporation, give legal

name of corporation, state where incorporated and names of President and Secretary of

Corporation; if a partnership, give name of firm and names of all individual co partners; if

bidder or other interested person is an individual, give first and last names in full.)

Signature of Bidder: Address of Bidder:


WM2A Project # 2016-24 HENRY BURNS PARK


SECTION 00 0050 - AGREEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 AGREEMENT FORM

A. The AIA STANDARD AGREEMENT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS

BETWEEN OWNER AND the GENERAL CONTRACTOR, will be the form used as

a Contract for this work.




WM2A Project # 2016-24


SECTION 00 0060 - GUARANTY BONDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GUARANTY BOND FORMS

A. Guaranty Bonds shall be executed on the AIA Standard Performance Bond and

Payment Bond.

1.2 AMOUNT OF BOND

A. Amount shown in each part of Guaranty Bond shall be equal to 100% of the contract

sum.

1.3 SURETY

A. Surety shall be a company licensed to do business in the State of Georgia and

acceptable to the Owner.






SECTION 00 0100 - GENERAL CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The AIA, STANDARD AGREEMENT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS BETWEEN

OWNER AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR

,inclusive, hereinafter referred to as General Conditions, are hereby made a part of

these Specifications and shall apply to all work executed under this contract. A copy

of this document is on file at the office of the Architect. Copies can be obtained by

General Contractors and Subcontractors, submitting bona fide bids on this project,

upon receipt of written request submitted to the Architect.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. The use of the term “General Contractor” within these specifications shall refer to the

“Contractor” as defined in the agreement.






SECTION 00 0120 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. These special conditions apply equally to all sections of these specifications.

B. Nothing in any of the Contract Documents shall be interpreted as being contrary to law

or local and state ordinances and all codes and laws of governing agencies (local and

state) shall be followed as though they were herein bound.

1.2 SPECIAL CONDITIONS

A. CONSTRUCTION LIMITS: The Contractor shall conduct all his activities within an

area defined as the project site. Any damage to public or private property beyond this

area shall be repaired at the Contractor's cost and in a manner satisfactory to the Owner.

1. The Owner will establish areas for storage of materials, staging and other

construction activities that take place outside of the building.

B. SAFETY CODE COMPLIANCE: Rules and regulations governing construction,

demolition and all excavation shall comply with the rules and regulations for the

prevention of accidents as issued by the local city or county having jurisdiction.

C. STANDARDS:

1. Wherever reference is made to the standard specifications of nationally known

organizations, the latest edition in effect on the date of this specification, shall

govern unless otherwise stated herein. Where specific articles, sections,

divisions or headings are not given, such specifications shall apply in full.

Standard specifications when included herein, by abbreviation, or otherwise,

shall form a part of this specification the same as if quoted in full.

D. The Architect may require, and the Contractor shall furnish, if required to do so,

certificates from manufacturers to the effect that the products or materials furnished by

them for use in the work comply with applicable specified requirements of the mate-

rials or products being furnished.GENERAL EQUIPMENT

REQUIREMENTS - FIELD DIMENSIONS: The drawings accompanying these

Specifications generally indicate the design and arrangement of all equipment,

apparatus, fixtures, accessories, etc., as necessary to complete the installation of all

systems. The exact location or arrangement of equipment, unless otherwise

dimensioned, is subject to minor changes necessitated by field conditions and shall be

made as required without additional cost to the Owner. Measurements shall be

verified by actual observation at construction site and each respective Contractor shall

be responsible for all of his work fitting into place in a satisfactory and workmanlike

manner to the approval of the Owner.



E. RULES AND REGULATIONS - CODE COMPLIANCE: The Contractor and

Subcontractor shall comply with all local, state, and applicable Federal agencies in

regards to Code requirements, Ordinances, and Laws.

F. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS: The Contractor shall furnish, during all phases of

construction, fire extinguishers in accordance with OSHA and the local Fire Marshal's

requirements.

G. PERMITS: The Contractor and his Subcontractors shall be responsible for obtaining

all building permits and pay all fees as required to complete their work shown on the

drawings and as specified herein.

H. WEATHER PROTECTION: The Contractor or his subcontractors shall furnish and

install any temporary enclosures, doors, and plastic covered windows and openings to

protect the construction from weather. All openings through roof shall be protected.

I. SPECIFICATION EXPLANATION:

1. Attention is directed to the fact that the detailed specification and separate

sections may be written in short or abridged form. In regard to every section of

the specifications and all parts thereof, mention therein or indications on the

drawings of articles, materials, operations, or methods required that the

Contractor: Provide each item mentioned and indicated; Perform each operation

prescribed; Provide therefore all necessary labor, equipment and incidentals.

2. Whenever in these specifications or on the drawings the words "directed",

"required", "permitted", "ordered", or words of like import are used, it shall be

understood that the direction, requirements, permission or order of the Architect

is intended; and similar words "approved", "acceptable", "satisfactory", or words

of like shall mean approved by, or acceptable to, or satisfactory to the Architect.

3. For convenience of reference and to facilitate the letting of contracts and

subcontracts, these specifications are separated into titled sections. Such

separation shall not, however, operate to make the Architect an arbiter to

establish limits to the contracts between the Contractor and Subcontractor, nor

shall such separation be interpreted as superseding normal union jurisdiction.

J. SCAFFOLDING: Erect and maintain scaffolding, ramps, runways, platforms, guards,

rails, stairs and ladders as necessary to protect the safety of all those involved with this

work.

K. MATERIAL STORAGE: Store materials in a secure and dry manner. Do not leave

any materials exposed to weather.

1.3 TESTING

A. GENERAL: The Owner shall employ an independent Testing Agency to inspect the

materials and workmanship and perform as a minimum the tests described herein. The

Agency shall submit inspection reports, certification and instances of noncompliance to

the Architect, Owner and Structural Engineer. The Testing Agency shall immediately

notify the Architect whenever the materials or the workmanship is not in compliance

with the construction documents.



B. QUANTITIES: The Owner shall furnish to the Testing Agency the anticipated

volume of earthwork, material quantities and construction schedule for the project.

The Agency shall use this information as a basis to establish a scope of work and cost

proposal to the Owner.






SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.

2. Work covered by Contract Documents.

3. Owner-furnished products.

4. Contractor-furnished, Owner-installed products.

5. Access to site.

6. Work restrictions.

7. Specification and drawing conventions.

8. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and

procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Improvements to Henry Burns Park.

1. Project Location: 3264 Ingleside Ave., Macon, GA.

B. Owner: Macon-Bibb County.

C. Architect: WM2A Architects; 348 Cotton Avenue, Suite 500; Macon, GA 31201;

478-745-4945

D. Contractor: Will be engaged after award.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the

following:

1. Renovations to the Henry Burns Park including but not limited to demo, grading,



erosion control, lighting, signage, playgrounds, turf, plant materials, trees and

irrigation systems. The scope of work is as indicated within the contact

documents for the project.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED, OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Contractor shall furnish products indicated. The Work includes unloading, handling,

storing, and protecting Contractor-furnished products as directed and turning them over

to Owner at Project closeout.

1.6 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations

as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of

this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do

not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Limit site disturbance, including earthwork and clearing of vegetation,

with permeable surfaces such as pervious paving areas, stormwater detention

facilities, and playgrounds that require additional staging areas in order to limit

compaction in the constructed area.

2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and

entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees,

and emergency vehicles at all times.

C. Condition of Existing Boy Scout Building: Maintain portions of existing building

affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction

period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

1.7 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing adjacent Boy Scout

building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction

operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as

not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless

otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or

used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied

or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of

authorities having jurisdiction.



2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect

Owner's operations.

1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working

hours of 6 a.m. to 8 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Weekend Hours: Same as times permitted for weekday work.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of

noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive

operations.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Controlled Substances: Use of controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.

1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of

language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in

particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the

Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending

on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically

stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to

the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on

Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following

are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:



1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms

used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published

as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes

referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.






SECTION 01 2100 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances.

Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer

selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be

provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by

Change Order.

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Lump-sum allowances.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of

allowances for testing and inspecting.

1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date

when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance

must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final

selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the

form specified for Change Orders.



1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the

site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for

installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.

C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other

portions of the Work.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as

required to coordinate installation.

1.7 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered

by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and

delivery to Project site.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site,

labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and

materials selected by Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the

Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.

C. Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to

manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and

accepted.

1. If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by

Owner. Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed.

1.8 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES

A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and

only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.

B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by

Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part

of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, taxes, insurance,

equipment rental, and similar costs.

C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include

Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins.



D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to

Owner by Change Order.

1.9 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order

proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance,

multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable,

include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal

product imperfections, and similar margins.

1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the

allowance.

2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution

of overhead costs and other margins claimed.

3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change

Orders related to unit-cost allowances.

4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by

independent quantity survey, measure, or count.

B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the

allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount

or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change

Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has

changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract

Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or

lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally

indicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or

defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials

and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and

interfaced with related work.



3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES:

A. Allowance No. 1: Quantity Allowance: Include in the base bid, 200 cu. yd. of

unsatisfactory soil excavation and disposal off-site and replacement with satisfactory

structural soil material from off-site, as specified in Section 31 2300 "Earthwork."

1.

B.

C.

Coordinate quantity allowance adjustment with unit-price requirements in

Section 01 2200 "Unit Prices."

Allowance No. 2: Utility cost: Include new 4” x 1” water tap connection

and 1” meter as detailed in the attached MWA attachment. $1,850.00.

Allowance No. 3: Utility cost: Include the cost of a new Ga Power electrical

service to the site as shown on C1-1.


October 21, 2016 Revised 11/1/2016

Charles Green WM2A Architects 348 Cotton Avenue Macon, Ga 31201

Re: New 1” Irrigation Meter ~ Proposed Property Address: 3298 Ingleside Avenue

Dear Charles Green,

The Macon Water Authority (MWA or the Authority) has reviewed your request for information regarding the installation of a 1” irrigation water meter at the subject property. Per the information provided to the Authority, the new irrigation water service will be utilized to irrigate the subject property. The new irrigation service will be extended from the existing 4” water main within the right-of-way of Ingleside Avenue and set on the subject property. The Authority will perform a 4” x 1” tap & set a 1” meter (with E-Coder) for a cost of $1,490.00. A pavement cut is required for the performance of the work; therefore, an additional cost of $360.00 will be required to repair the asphalt pavement.

We require a Double Check (DC) backflow prevention device to be installed on the water line, on the customer side, before the service is extended. The Contractor will be responsible for the installation of the backflow prevention devices and the extension of the private services from the meters. A “Certified Backflow Prevention Tester” shall test the backflow preventers at the time of installation and yearly thereafter. A copy of the reports must be submitted to the

Macon Water Authority, Attn: Mr. Cole Dove, via email ([email protected]) or fax (478-738-3864). All backflowprevention devices must be installed and tested within seven (7) business days after meter installations and established use of the meter accounts. Failure to comply with these requirements will result in compliance charges ($100.00 per day) and/or termination of water service.

The costs stated herein are good for ninety (90) days from the date of this letter. Please contact Applications in our Customer Care department at (478) 464-5616 regarding the application fees ($25.00), any other applicable fees, payment terms and all customer service account related inquiries. These fees must be paid prior to the performance of the work and/or installation of the meter. The work is hereby approved/released by Engineering and a work order can be issued upon payment of fees.

Sincerely,

Jarvis Fennelle Jarvis Fennelle Engineering Technician I

Macon Water Authority Engineering Department 47 8-738-6471 (Office) 47 8-738-3864 (Fax) CC: Algernon Wallace, Customer Service (via email), Cole Dove, Reggie Cooper

R.A. “Tony” Rojas Executive Director & President Members

Samuel F. Hart, Sr., Chairman Frank Patterson, Vice-Chairman Javors J. Lucas Dorothy “Dot” C. Black Dwight Jones Bert Bivins, III Ed DeFore

Macon Water Authority 790 Second Street * P.O. Box 108

Macon, GA 31202-0108 (478) 464-5600 * FAX (478) 750-2007

Visit Us @ www.maconwater.org

mailto:[email protected]



SECTION 01 2200 - UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration

of the Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or

a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate

modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the

Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,

applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.

B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that

requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit

prices are specified in those Sections.

C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that

involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's

expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification

Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under

each unit price.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES

A. Unit Price 1: Removal of unsatisfactory soil and replacement with satisfactory soil

material. Per cubic yard price $_________ .

1. Description: Unsatisfactory soil excavation and disposal off site and

replacement with satisfactory fill material or engineered fill from off site, as

required, according to Section 31 2300 "Earthwork"

2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of soil excavated, based on survey of volume

removed.

3. Quantity Allowance: Coordinate unit price with allowance adjustment

requirements in Section 01 2100 "Allowances."




SECTION 01 2300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work

defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid

amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of

construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or

installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in

the Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the

Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are

made to the Contract Sum.

1.3 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely

integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and

similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not

indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved,

in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted,

rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of

negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1 SOUTH PLAYGROUND:

1. Alternate: Delete south playground, edging, mulch, grading, seat wall, south

playground equipment in its entirety.

2. Alternate 2: Delete all site furniture, benches, tables and waste receptacles.

3. Alternate 3: Delete the two monument signs and foundations. Provide cast

sidewalk instead. Rough-in of electrical raceway remains in the contract.




SECTION 01 2500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of

construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by

Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due

to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory

changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that

are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer

advantage to Contractor or Owner.


A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration.

Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include

Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the

following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation

cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed

to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and

separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed

substitution.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for

substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of



proposed substitution within 15days of receipt of request, or seven days of

receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or

Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a

proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed

substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to

perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the

approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of

need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and

review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when

the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not

satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record

noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will

produce indicated results.

b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that

specified product provided.

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if

received 10 days or more prior to bid date. Requests received after that time shall be

rejected by the Architect. Approval of such requests shall be issued as an addendum to

all bidders prior to bid date.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when

the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not

satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record

noncompliance with these requirements:



a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time,

energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional

responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities

may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation

services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar

considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract

Documents.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will

produce indicated results.

d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction

schedule.

f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities

having jurisdiction.

g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the

Work.

i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested

substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is

uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is

acceptable to all contractors involved.





SECTION 01 2600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and

processing Contract modifications.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work,

not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of

proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the

Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised

Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to

stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 10 days, when not otherwise

specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost

adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the

change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit

costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested,

furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts

of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the

effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity

duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available

total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary,"

and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail."



B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications

to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to

Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change

on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate

the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with

total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey

data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of

trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and

finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting

an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures" if the

proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or

system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request

(Proposal)," with attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary,"

and Form 13.6C, "Proposal Worksheet Detail."

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 01 2100 "Allowances" for administrative

procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to

reflect actual costs of allowances.

B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 01 2200 "Unit Prices" for administrative

procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to

reflect measured scope of unit-price work.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Construction Manager will

issue a Change Order for signatures of Architect and Contractor on ConsensusDocs

525.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive.

Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the

Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the

Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the



Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work

required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data

necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.






SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and

process Applications for Payment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the

Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing

Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of

Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative

forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.

b. Submittal schedule.

c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's

construction schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later

than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for

Payment.

3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases

requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values

coordinated with each phase of payment.

4. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's

construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide

subschedules showing values coordinated with each element.

5. Subschedules for Separate Design Contracts: Where the Owner has retained

design professionals under separate contracts who will each provide certification

of payment requests, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with the



scope of each design services contract as described in Section 01 1000

"Summary."

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line

items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification

Section.

1. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G702.

2. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate

the following for each item listed:

a. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to

nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

1) Labor.

2) Materials.

3) Equipment.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with

Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal

subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for

Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the

Contract Sum and subcontract amount.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work

where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased

or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If

required, include evidence of insurance.

6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials,

for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part

of the Work.

7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each

allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the

unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the

Contract Documents to determine quantities.

8. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for

each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate

owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor.

9. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be

complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and

profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of

actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the



schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at

Contractor's option.

10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next

Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change

Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be

consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid

for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the

Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered

by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 as form for Applications

for Payment.

D. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for

Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of

schedule of values.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a

person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will

return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction

schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for

Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for

work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued

before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested

project acceleration.

F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or

equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate

between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and

consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid

invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation;

do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.



3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of

previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous

Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for

Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment

and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for

Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall

include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording

appropriate information about application.

H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of

mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for

construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous

application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or

full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must

submit waivers.

4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final

waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the

application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.

I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must

precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the

following:

1. List of subcontractors.

2. Schedule of values.

3. Schedule of unit prices.

4. Initial progress report.

5. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

6. Performance and payment bonds.

J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the

Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100

percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete

and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued

previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.



K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit

final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not

previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and

proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.

3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.

4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."

5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."

6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."

7. Evidence that claims have been settled.






SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on

Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures.

2. Coordination drawings.

3. Requests for Information (RFIs).

4. Project meetings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by

or clarifications of the Contract Documents.


A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed

for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment

fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information

in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or

supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.

3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a

list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in

attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list

addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone

numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of

individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.



1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.

Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each

other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results

where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other

components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance

and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

Retain option in "Administrative Procedures" Paragraph below for projects with

multiple contracts.

B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required

administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other

contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such

administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Preparation of the schedule of values.

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or

interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI

in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by

Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in

Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information

or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name.

2. Project number.

3. Date.

4. Name of Contractor.

5. Name of Architect.

6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.

7. RFI subject.

8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.

9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.



11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts

the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

12. Contractor's signature.

13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product

Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to

fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of

affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: ConsensusDocs 204 Software-generated form with substantially the same

content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and

respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs

received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following

working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.

c. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.

d. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case

Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional

information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal

according to Section 01 2600 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of

receipt of the RFI response. If special meetings such as site mobilization

conferences, special inspections conferences, or LEED coordination

conferences are required, insert articles here specifying meeting

requirements.






SECTION 01 3200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the

progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's construction schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling,

monitoring, and controlling the construction project.


A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.

2. PDF electronic file.

B. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.


A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review

methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and

Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Discuss constraints, including phasing work stages interim milestones and partial

Owner occupancy.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of

subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other

required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from

entities involved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work

to date of final completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that

shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule

to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before

each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions

have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the

report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but

not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity

durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate

contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor

with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.




SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and

procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and

other submittals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require

Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in

individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order

by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review,

ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include

additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by

Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those

corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values,

and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule.

Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those

submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required

early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings

will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the

Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record

drawings.



B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as

follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect’s receipt of submittal. No

extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit

submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow

additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect

will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for

coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same

manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each resubmittal.

4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that

submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's

consultants, allow 10 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be

returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

C. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for

identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title

block.

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to

record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name of Architect.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Name of subcontractor.

f. Name of supplier.

g. Name of manufacturer.

h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed

by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01).

Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another

decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final

submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the

Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to

specified number of copies to Architect.



5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and

appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a

transmittal form. Architect will return without review submittals received from

sources other than Contractor. Retain "Electronic Submittals" Paragraph below if

requiring electronic submittals instead of paper submittals.

D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic

submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating

submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form

with links enabling navigation to each item.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on

Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other

than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from

requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations.

Include same identification information as related submittal.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial

submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent

of revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from

Architect's action stamp.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors,

suppliers, fabricators, and installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as

necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal

forms.

I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only

final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required

by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual

Specification Sections.

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect’s shared

folder site specifically established for Project.



a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file

as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file

as an electronic Project record document file.

3. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of Additional copies may be

required for each type of submittal in remaining paragraphs below for projects

with a construction manager or a commissioning authority.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of

construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard

published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product

Data.

C. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01

3100 "Project Management and Coordination."

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section

01 3200 "Construction Progress Documentation."

E. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements

specified in Section 01 2900 "Payment Procedures."

F. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements

specified in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."

G. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7823

"Operation and Maintenance Data."

H. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead

certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead

certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for

coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract

Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp

before submitting to Architect.



B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section

01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include

Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number,

name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal

has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract

Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate

corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal

with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it,

or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each

submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of

partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be

returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect

without action.




SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and

quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements

specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for

compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction

activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities.

Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other

quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the

Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services

required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by

provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and

during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate

that proposed construction will comply with requirements. Revise the number of

projects in "Experienced" Paragraph below to suit Project, office policy, and Owner's

requirements. Delete if experience requirements are included in individual

Specification Sections or are prohibited by law.

B. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having

successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and

extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having

complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.




A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and

elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction.

1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.

2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two

dimensions.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification

levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or

systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful

in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required

units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as

well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or

assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this

Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service

performance.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's

responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of

testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they

are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances,

as authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated

by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to

Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation,

including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01

3300 "Submittal Procedures."

C. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's

technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical



representative's services include participation in pre-installation conferences,

examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of

Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of

written reports. Retain "Testing Agency Responsibilities" Paragraph below if

Contractor engages testing agency.

D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in

performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and

inspections. CONSTRUCTION TESTING IS PAID BY THE OWNER. Coordination

of timely testing is the responsibility of the contractor.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services,

repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore

patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that

are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements

for cutting and patching in Section 01 7300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.




SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security

and protection facilities.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be

included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use

temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's

construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities


B. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for

construction operations.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas

for construction personnel.

B. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and

authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for

management of fire-prevention program.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for

temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect

each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link

fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum

2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-

OD top rails.

B. Insulation: Un-faced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or

rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50,

respectively.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required

by locations and classes of fire exposures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum

interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required

by progress of the Work.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service

can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and

maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial

Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for

use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and

facilities.



E. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of

sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.

2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by

Owner.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within

construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible

according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion

inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after

Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under

conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and

paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and

maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations.

Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as

necessary for construction operations.

1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads

and paved areas.

2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved

areas according to Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving."

3. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until

immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course

pavement before installation of final course according to Section 32 1216

"Asphalt Paving."

C. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or

adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7419

"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."



3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures,

utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those

indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil

erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed

areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and

sedimentation-control Drawings.

1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by

construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones.

2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during

construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and

sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project.

4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas

disturbed during removal.

C. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent

flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside

the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations.

Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site

enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering

site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined

sufficient to accommodate construction operations.

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to

authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.

F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning

signs and lighting.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize

waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.



1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve

indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service

has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no

later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent

construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary

facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that

cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of

Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification

signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used

during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified

in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures."




SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products

for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard

warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for

Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the

terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including

make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's

published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another

project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not

considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through

submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function,

dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other

characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific

manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design

product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the

significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance,

physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating

comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable

product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include

Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.



1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in

"Comparable Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product

request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed

comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of

receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 01 3300 "Submittal

Procedures."

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a

comparable product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in

Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or

more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously

selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,

deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's

written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for

items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to

deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's

original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and

instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract

Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly

protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting

of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.



3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a

weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent

condensation.

4. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

5. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials

and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with

Owner.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,

other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and

limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under

requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual

manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer

to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to

provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and

identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific

information and properly executed.

2. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements

for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 7700 "Closeout

Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract

Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of

installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other

items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard

options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced

and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in

conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.



4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make

selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the

Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or

equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in

"Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed

product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide

the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or

substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or

source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies

with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's

convenience will not be considered.

3. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both

manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that

complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for

Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers'

names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies

with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's

convenience will not be considered.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a

product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the

specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named

manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles,

dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.

Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of

an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's

sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's

sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with

other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 2500

"Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected

by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that

complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or



texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium

items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for

comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following

conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to

record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract

Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those

named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as

performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and

requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.

5. Samples, if requested.





SECTION 01 7300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing

execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Field engineering and surveying.

3. Installation of the Work.

4. Cutting and patching.

5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.

6. Progress cleaning.

7. Starting and adjusting.

8. Protection of installed construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or

performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original

conditions after installation of other work.


A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and

elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to

the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and

patching.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include

changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in

building appearance and other significant visual elements.



3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will

perform patching work.

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.

5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that

cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems

that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate

length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems

during interruption of permanent services and systems.

D. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to

accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified

to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing

land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and

patching of construction elements.

1. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related

components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as

intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or

safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment.

b. Electrical wiring systems.

2. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in

visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed

construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's

aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and

patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's

written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.



B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For

exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the

fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when

installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and

functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework,

investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical

and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of

connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping;

underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by

public utilities serving Project site.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust,

move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility

appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities


B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly.

Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work

are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by

field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with

construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of

the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field

conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to

Architect according to requirements in Section 01 3100 "Project Management and

Coordination."



3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown

on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If

discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,

grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property

corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar

reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent

benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on

Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with

authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct

alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for

maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing

products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible

results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial

Completion.

D. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise

levels.

E.

F. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not

considered hazardous.



3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and

patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete

without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or

performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore

surfaces to their original condition.

B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent

damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project

that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

D. Existing Utility Services Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be

removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to

minimize interruption to occupied areas.

E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding,

and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage

elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures

with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required,

and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover

openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed

surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or

a diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections

where required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or

partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe

or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are

complete.

F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar

operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as

invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements

specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to

demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish

restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize

evidence of patching and refinishing.



a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other

finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3.

G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.

Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work

performed by Owner's construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction

schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based

on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are

required due to differences in actual construction progress.

3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce

requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste

materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or

three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other

waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to

regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other

contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness

necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum

the entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to

written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only



cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not

recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and

that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary

to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

F. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste

materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements

in Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and

adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to

ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary

through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable

components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

I. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or

otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with

requirements in Section 01 9113 "General Commissioning Requirements."

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper

operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and

safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.




SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final cleaning.

3. Repair of the Work.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items

specified in other Sections.

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be

completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on

the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10

days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion.

List items below that are incomplete at time of request.



1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for

determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 2900 "Payment

Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's

Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected

(punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall

state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected

by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction

including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of

construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated

portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial

Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's

rights under warranty.

B. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.

C. PRODUCTS

1.10 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer

or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are

potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to

comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and

antipollution regulations.



B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.

Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building

cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for

certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated

portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction

activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste

material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and

other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured

surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material

from Project site.

e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free

condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid

disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective

surfaces to their original condition.

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including

roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and

similar spaces.

g. Wipe surfaces of IRRIGATION AND electrical equipment and similar

equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and

other foreign substances.

h. CLean light fixtures, lamps, BOLLARDS, and reflectors to function with

full efficiency.

i. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01

7419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

2.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for

determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing

defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials,

and properly adjusting operating equipment.

1. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and

defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply

with requirements for new fixtures.




SECTION 01 7823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation

and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

4. Product maintenance manuals.

5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular

interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in

individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals.

Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance

submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to

revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically

indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with

applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation

and maintenance directory.



b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before

commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general

scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting

inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing

demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit

copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's

comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and

finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures,

repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name

and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name,

address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,

and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and

drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the

following:

1. Inspection procedures.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials

and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of

circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

2.2 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system,

include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance

procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information,



maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list

of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine

maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly,

monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that

provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data

indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into

the Work.

C. Comply with Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting

operation and maintenance documentation.




SECTION 01 7839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record

documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings.

2. Record Product Data.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Final Submittal:

1) Submit one set of red lined as-builts.

B. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and three annotated PDF electronic files

and directories of each submittal (on submitted thumb drives).

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance

manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings

and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are

issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where

installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who

obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or

similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up



record prints.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where

installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract

modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations

that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials,

and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information

necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been

submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record

Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where

applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as one paper copy in a three ring binder and

three scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications on

thumb drives.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for

project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record

documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. As-Built Record Drawings shall be kept up-to-date at all times. The Contractor shall

schedule a time once a week to review the drawings with the Owner and the Architect.

1. To the maximum extent possible, all utilities shall be buried a minimum of

eighteen (18) inches below the surface. A tracer wire shall be placed in the trench

or excavation of all utilities at a minimum depth of six (6) inches. Exception:

Storm drain lines shall have a caution tape provided in the excavation at an

approximate depth of twelve (12) inches in lieu of a tracer wire.




SECTION 01 7900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of lighting and irrigation equipment.


A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with

requirements in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and

maintenance procedures and training.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required

to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's

personnel.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training

modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by

individual Specification Sections.

B. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner.

Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition

existing before initial training use.




SECTION 02 4119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. Wood and concrete debris to

be removed and deposed of in a proper site.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to

prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.

B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and

reinstall where indicated.

1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by

Owner as far as practical.

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before

proceeding with selective demolition.

C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

D. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect

them against damage during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations

before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations

of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective

demolition operations.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine

extent of selective demolition required.

C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with

intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and

extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction

photographs.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain

and protect them against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in

Section 01 1000 "Summary."

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and

debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks,

walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 01 5000

"Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to

prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as

required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of

construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled

movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by

new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within

limitations of governing regulations and as follows:



1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.

Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining

construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or

grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent

surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid

marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents

of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch

and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not

to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged,

reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished

materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent

surfaces and areas.

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device

that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of

them.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by

selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before

selective demolition operations began.




SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete

materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings.

2. Foundation walls.

3. Slabs-on-grade.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone..

B. Curing: Action taken by which hydraulic-cement concrete matures and develops

hardened properties over time as result of continued hydration of cement in presence of

sufficient water and heat.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when

characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other

circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

B. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement,

prepared according to ACI 315, “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.”

Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement,

and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for

openings through concrete structures


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed

concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for

production facilities and equipment.



B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same

brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and

obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Concrete Testing Service: OWNER shall engage a qualified independent testing

agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent

bending and damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous,

true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize

number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with

DOC PS 1, and as follows:

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond

with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent

treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and

fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar

supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of

Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact

forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2

stainless-steel bar supports.



2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type,

brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray .

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better,

graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. 15 mil thick under gym slab and 10

mill thick under all other concrete slabs. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive

or pressure-sensitive tape.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400.

b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 10 and 15.

c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120.

d. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 16.

e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 10 and 15 mil.

f. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 10 and 15.

g. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 10 and 15 mil Green.

h. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 10 and 15 mil Class A.

B. Granular Fill: 4” thick, Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed

gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5

percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

C. Fine-Graded Granular Material: 2” crusher run under SIDEWALKS. Clean mixture of

crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size

10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve,

and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve; complying with deleterious substance

limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated

cellulosic fiber.

B. Semi-rigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin



with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the

basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed

mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by

weight of cement.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.

2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 564 lb/cu. yd.

3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.

4. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:



3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.


C. Sidewalks-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:




4. Air Content: Per ACI-301 Table 4.2.2.4, but shall not exceed 3 percent. 5. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at

manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd.

a. Location: Use fiber reinforcement at gymnasium floor to receive wood

athletic flooring only.

2.8 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.9 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to



ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery

time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F,

reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support

vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied,

until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

C. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to

support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

D. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of

Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

E. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust,

dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

F. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's

written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work

that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at

not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard

enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection

operations need to be maintained.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed,

delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for

exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to

ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.



3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing

reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder

before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials

that would reduce bond to concrete.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of

concrete.

B. Contraction Joints in Sidewalks-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,

sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth

equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with

shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into

concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface

and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and

embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement

unless approved by Architect.

C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete

work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing

actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for

three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within

the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place

concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents

or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture

designs.

D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled



mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water

equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid

nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.

Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.7 FINISHING SIDEWALKS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening,

and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic

or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is

still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

3.8 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other

trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as

specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete

filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is

still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners,

intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams,

supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period,

moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period,

continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency

to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each

concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for

each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.

2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd.

or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.



a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five

compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be

conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch

if fewer than five are used.

3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each

composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete;

one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour

of each concrete mixture.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for

each composite sample.

b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two

laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two

specimens at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from

a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at

age indicated.

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion

laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide

corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any

three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified

compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below

specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and

Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests

shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement,

name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in

Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and

materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and

28-day tests.

10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sono-scope, or other nondestructive

device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for

approval or rejection of concrete.

11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of

concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive

strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of

concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other

methods as directed by Architect.

12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to



determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified

requirements.

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not

comply with the Contract Documents.

14. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within

24 hours of finishing.

C. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of

finishing.




SECTION 04 2000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units (CMU's).

2. Brick veneer units.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of exposed masonry unit and

colored mortar.


A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units

include data on material properties.


A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by

requirements in the Contract Documents.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or

coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit

masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather

construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements

contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage

of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the

standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement

joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

1. Provide bullnose units for outside corners of interior partitions, except where

indicated otherwise.

B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area

compressive strength of 1900 psi.

2. Density Classification: Lightweight.

3. Size: Typical 7-5/8-inch by 15-5/8-inch actual face dimension by 3/8-inch less

than nominal thickness indicated.

C. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area

compressive strength of 4050 psi.

2. Density Classification: Normal weight.

3. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8

inches long.

2.3 MASONRY LINTELS

A. General: Provide one of the following:

B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond

beam CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout.

Retain subparagraph below for square brick, 8 inches (203 mm) in nominal size.

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for

cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to

produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.



C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime

containing no other ingredients.

D. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated

lime and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing

no other ingredients.

1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:

E. Aggregate for Standard Gray Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing

the No. 16 sieve.

2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

G. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture

complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for

use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.

b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset.

c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA.

H. Water: Potable.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M,

Grade 60.

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.

2. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter.

3. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.

4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee

units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type

with single pair of side rods.

D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multi-wythe Masonry:

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=4040&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=4042&mf=04&src=wd






1. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at

each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with

pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. Size

ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch

cover on outside face.

2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from

materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A

153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,

Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least

halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of

wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.

C. Anchor Bolts: L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with

ASTM A 563hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply

with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.

2.7 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, closed-cell product

extruded with an integral skin.

1. R-Value: R7.5, 1 1/2" thickness

B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application

indicated.

2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for

removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from

new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product

expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of

masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.

b. EaCo Chem, Inc.

c. ProSoCo, Inc.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=4055&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd






2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,

accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other

admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.

3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.

4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.

5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be

exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is

consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended

mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly

blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

1. Mix to match Architect's sample.

2. Application: Use prebelnded dry mortar mix for exposed mortar joints with the

following units:

a. Face Brick.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.

Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is

indicated.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S.

2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.

3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet

walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and

for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

4. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)

that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for

dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1.

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C

143/C 143M.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a

continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws;

provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless

wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible,

cut edges concealed.

3.2 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2

inch or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than

plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more

than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more

than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do

not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2

inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in

10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10

feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,

3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus

1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than

plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus

or minus 1/8 inch.



3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform

joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns,

and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and,

where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry

in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face

dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other

Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise

indicated.

E. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels,

posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow brick CMUs as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed

joints.

2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.

3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course

on footings.

4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting

course on footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with

sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed

joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than

joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes

(other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 CAVITY WALLS

A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:

1. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.

a. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry,



use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal

wire in facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement

regardless of whether bed joints align.

B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction.

Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not

attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.

C. Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Section 07 1113 "Bituminous

Dampproofing."

D. Apply air barrier to face of backup wythe to comply with Section 07 2726

"Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers."

E. Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately

12 inches o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic

fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and

other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units

firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown.

3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum

cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a

minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.

2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet

walls.

3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings

and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous

reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete and masonry backup with

masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:

1. Embed connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not

less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of

sheathing.

2. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties

up and down.



3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24

inches o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. of wall

area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals,

not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter.

3.8 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels,

ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in

cavities, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could

puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall

flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with

mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as

recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry

at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not

less than 2 inches to form end dams.

3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop

flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible

flashing to top of metal drip edge.

4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of

wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere

flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry

immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.

2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

D. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements

for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

E. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified

weep/vent products to form vents.

1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated.

Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and

inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work



areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to

comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion

thereof.

3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to

remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as

follows:

1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned

for comparison purposes.

2. Protect surfaces from contact with cleaner.

3. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or

soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and

mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as

fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's

property.




SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel edgings.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:

1. Loose steel lintels.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria

indicated.

B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders shall withstand the

effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI

A14.3.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. METAL PRODUCTS


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction

contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply

with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop

primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.



B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into

concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages,

including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that

are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time

for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless

otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work,

provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

2.3 NONFERROUS METALS

A. Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000

(muntz metal, 60 percent copper).

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for

exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or

ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and

class required.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex

nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex

nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers.

D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.

E. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.

G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.



H. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six

times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed

when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,

conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal

modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint

20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

D. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying

with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty

loading applications.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible.

Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use

connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for

reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a

radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough

areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or

otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended

so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that

of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed

fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips

flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least

conspicuous.



G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to

exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,

screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space

anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated

loads.

1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip

with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum

6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners

of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed

to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless

otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary

to receive adjacent construction.

C. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of

sizes indicated.

1. Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated.

2. Drill or punch girders and plates for field-bolted connections where indicated.

3. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or

punch holes at 24 inches o.c.

D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with where indicated.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of

profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter

corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal

Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.



C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend

into surrounding surface.

2.10 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A

153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and

iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with

paint adhesion.

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be

embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for

installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment,

and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and

measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections

that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping

size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been

hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:




3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended

so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that

of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where

metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide

threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through

bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.



E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into

concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being

supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on

Shop Drawings.

B. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout

column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed

and leveled.

3.3 INSTALLING NOSINGS, TREADS, AND THRESHOLDS

A. Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated.

B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces

and level with tread surfaces.

C. Seal thresholds exposed to exterior with elastomeric sealant complying with Section 07

9200 "Joint Sealants" to provide a watertight installation.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,

and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used

for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections,

and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting."




SECTION 05 5213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior Steel pipe and tube railings.


A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by

a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria

indicated.

B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine

allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:

1. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum

ultimate tensile strength divided by 1.95.

C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the

following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface

temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling,

opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other

detrimental effects.



1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by

insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.



1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.

2. Railing brackets.

3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed

by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS

D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction

contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply

with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop

primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.



B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates,

and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor

bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not

support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance

requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited

to, the following:

1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:

a. McNichols Company

b. Pisor Industries, Inc.

c. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam

marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and

finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 STEEL AND IRON

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).

B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule

40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A

47M, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:



1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B

633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type,

grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other

types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for

attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for

attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the

standard fastening method for railings indicated.

3. Provide square or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners

unless otherwise indicated.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining,

without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit

masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by

testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing

agency.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply

with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy

Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal

alloy welded.

1. For aluminum railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of

metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in

fabricated items.

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting"

and Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."

C. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Section 09 9113

"Exterior Painting" and Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically

recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.



F. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled

expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable

anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.

1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is

resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or

waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,

dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than

that required to support structural loads.

1. Exterior railings shall be constructed of aluminum.

2. Interior railings shall be constructed of ungalvanized steel.

B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and

assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.

Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that

maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a

radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough

areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.

Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar

items.

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.

H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use

fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at

fittings.




3. Remove flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of

adjoining surfaces.



I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and

fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if

this is manufacturer's standard splicing method.

J. Form changes in direction as follows:

1. By bending.

K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required;

maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,

cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.

Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges,

miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work


1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide

crush-resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to

structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of

substrate.

O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or

masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by

railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 6 inches

long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of

post, with metal plate forming bottom closure.


A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal

Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces

are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples.

Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance

of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples

and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.



D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and

texture, of railings.

2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings,

brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior

concrete or masonry.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply

with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application

Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop

painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or

masonry.

1. Shop prime at nongalvanized interior steel railings with primers specified in

Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" .

D. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 09 91123 "Interior Painting."

1. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to

verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for

Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings

accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and

levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated

or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by

mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.



3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from

parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch

in 12 feet.

C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact

with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of

bituminous paint.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where

necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place

construction.

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently

connecting railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using

plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.

B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing

components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication"

Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

3.4 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post

for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill

annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or

anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's

written instructions.

B. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing

anchoring material.

C. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post.

D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required

by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:

1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.

3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS

A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide

brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall

surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to



support structural loads.

1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.

2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support

structural loads.

B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and

hanger or lag bolts.

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean aluminum by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with

clean water.

B. Touchup Painting at nongalvanized interior steel railings: Cleaning and touchup

painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are

specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary

protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings

at time of Substantial Completion.




SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking and nailers.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment

manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply

with requirements

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer

and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with

requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no

grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of

any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber

graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade

lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or

less, no limit for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and

containing no arsenic or chromium.



B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not

use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated

material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the

ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and

similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and

waterproofing.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or

attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.

2. Nailers.

3. Furring.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any

species.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and

the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB.

2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fire-retardant treated, in

thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements

specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact,

pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide

fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex

nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.




A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,

butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene

film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not

less than 0.025 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut,

and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for

accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply

with requirements for attaching other construction.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If,

despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered

borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered

label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes

sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered

borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered

label.




SECTION 09 9113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the

following exterior substrates:

1. Steel.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and

application instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2

articles for the paint category indicated.

B. Painting Systems Schedule: All trade names and numbers listed hereinafter are in the

following order, unless specifically shown otherwise:

1. ICI ICI/GLIDDEN AND DEVOE

2. MS Martin Senour

3. PL Pratt and Lambert

4. BM Benjamin Moore

5. SW Sherwin Williams

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one

another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as

demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with

requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with

existing finishes and primers.

C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,

grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or

apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,

brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut

in sharp lines and color breaks.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to

work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by

Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged

or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Prime Coat – Alkyd MultiPurpose Metal Primer:



a. ICI 4160 Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank and Structural Primer

b. MS Tough Coat® Rust Control Universal Metal Primer

c. PL S45XX Steeltech® Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer

d. BM Super Spec HP Universal Alkyd Metal Primer P07

e. SW B66W00001 - DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish

2. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.

3. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel, matching topcoat.

4. Top Coat - Alkyd Industrial Enamel

a. ICI 4308 Devguard 4308 Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel

b. MS Tough Coat® Heavy Duty Alkyd Enamel

c. PL S45XX Techgard Maintenance Gloss Enamel

d. BM Benjamin Moore® Super Spec HP® D.T.M. Aklyd Gloss

Enamel P26

e. SW B66W00111 - DTM Acrylic Gloss Acrylic Coating




SECTION 10 1423 - PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Room-identification signs.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.

1. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and

Braille, and layout for each sign at least half size.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign

schedule.


A. Maintenance data.


1. Uniformity of Manufacturer: For each sign form and graphic image process

indicated, furnish products of single manufacturer.

2. Disability Compliance: Meet requirements of Georgia Code Chapter 120-3-20

"Accessibility Code for Buildings and Facilities”.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural

& Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for

Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs.

2.2 SIGNS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "ASI

Intouch Series ADA Ready Room"; ASI Sign Systems, Inc. or comparable product by

one of the following:

1. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division.

2. Allen Markings International.

3. APCO Graphics, Inc.

C. Room-Identification Sign : Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and

characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles;

and as follows:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Indicated on Drawings.

2. Laminated-Sheet Sign: Photopolymer face sheet with raised graphics laminated

to phenolic backing sheet to produce composite sheet.

a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign.

b. Color(s): Match existing signage.

3. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall with tamper resistant anchors.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of

signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with

the following:

1. Use tamper resistant fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.

2. Sign Mounting Fasteners:

a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to

back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless

otherwise indicated.

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.



2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements

indicated.

1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather

to resist water penetration and retention.

2. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or

discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of

flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are

inconspicuous.

4. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners.

5. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to

attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed

fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with

sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility

standard.

3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or

debris that would impair installation.

4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact

with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of

bituminous paint.

B. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs

on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface,

install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of

surface, and tighten.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.


WM2A Project #2016-24 HENRY BURNS PARK


SECTION 101426 - POST AND PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Internally illuminated post and panel signs.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete foundations and concrete fill.


A. Structural Performance: Provide post and panel signs capable of withstanding the effects of

gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures:

a. Uniform pressure per 2012 IBC 1609.6.4 with torsional effects identified in ASCE

7-10 Figure 29.4-1.

B. Quantity: There shall be two of these signs to produce. Bid is to include all work for all fourteen

signs listed below. Each sign shall have a different name and address; the remainder of the sign

is same as drawing for each double sided sign. All signs shall be furnished and installed at

various sites around Macon-Bibb County. Sign text and location to be:

Henry Burns Park

3298 Ingleside Ave

C. Thermal Movements: Provide post and panel signs that allow for thermal movements resulting

from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing

buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other

detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to

both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.



1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance

Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for post and panel/pylon signage.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half

size and full-size details of graphics.

a. Include full-size templates for cutout characters and graphic symbols.

3. Show locations of electrical service connections.

4. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis

data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their

preparation.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections

of units showing the full range of colors available for the following:

1. Aluminum.

2. Acrylic sheet, 3/16” thick.

D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color,

texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated:

1. Aluminum: For each form, finish, and color, on 6-inch- long sections of extrusions and

squares of sheet at least 4 by 4 inches.

2. Acrylic Sheet: 4 by 4 inches for each color required.

E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

G. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

1. Installer shall be capable of providing replacement message bars within 10 working days

of receipt of order.



B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products

similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-

service performance.

C. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single

manufacturer.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility

Guidelines and ICC A117.1.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit installation of signs to be performed according to manufacturers' written

instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for post and panel/pylon signage. Furnish setting

drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages and other items that are to be

embedded in concrete.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of post and panel signs that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Deterioration of metal finishes beyond normal weathering.

b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination.

c. LED internal lights.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by

aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the

strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by

aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the

strength and durability properties of Alloy 6063-T5.

C. Steel:

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating, either commercial

or forming steel.

2. Steel Tubing or Pipe: ASTM A 500, Grade B.

3. Steel Members Fabricated from Plate or Bar Stock: ASTM A 529/A 529M or

ASTM A 572/A 572M, 42,000-psi (290-MPa) minimum yield strength.

4. Bolts for Steel Framing: ASTM A 307 or ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) as necessary

for design loads and connection details.

5. For steel exposed to view on completion, provide materials having flat, smooth surfaces

without blemishes. Do not use materials whose surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks,

roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

D. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).

E. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background and frame colors, provide

colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic

manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for

three years for application intended.

1. Custom Paint Colors: Match Matthews color matching system.

F. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 POST AND PANEL SIGNS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

Basis of Design, The Signstore, 1826 Broadway, Macon. GA 31201

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Allen Industries Architectural Signage.

2. APCO Graphics, Inc.

3. ASI-Modulex, Inc.

4. Best Sign Systems Inc.



5. Bunting Graphics, Inc.

6. Charleston Industries, Inc.

7. Nelson-Harkins Industries.

8. Signature Signs, Incorporated.

9. Supersine Company (The).

10. Vomar Products, Inc.

2.3 PANEL SIGNS

A. Sign Message Panels: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under

installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from

corner to corner.

1. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners or backing materials as

needed to produce surfaces without distortion, buckles, warp, or other surface

deformations.

2. Continuously weld joints and seams unless other methods are indicated; grind, fill, and

dress welds to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces with welds invisible after final

finishing.

B. Message Panel Materials:

1. Aluminum Sheet: 0.125 inch thick.

a. Panel Finish: Baked enamel.

b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Acrylic Sheet: Translucent 3/16” thick.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Corner Condition: Rounded to radius indicated.

4. Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantone color matching system.

5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

6. Extruded-Aluminum Frames: Mitered with concealed anchors.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

b. Frame Type: As indicated.

1) Manufacturer's standard non-corroding anchors for substrates encountered.

C. Hollow-Box-Type Panel Signs: Frame message panel with formed aluminum sheet or extruded

hollow-box-type frame with ends flanged to engage slots in posts or attached to posts with

extruded-aluminum fittings. Close top and bottom edges of panels with manufacturer's standard

welded seams or extrusions.

1. Message Panel Materials:

a. Aluminum Sheet: 0.125 inch thick.

1) Panel Finish: Baked enamel.



2) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

b. Acrylic Sheet: Translucent 3/16” thick.

1) Color: As indicated to match Macon-Bibb Parks logo.

2. Hollow-Box Depth: 12 inches.

a. Corner Condition: Rounded to radius indicated.

b. Finish: Baked enamel.

c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Mounting: Around posts.

a. Manufacturer's standard non-corroding anchors for substrates encountered.

b. Provide clips welded to back of panels for installation without visible fasteners.

4. Illuminated-Sign Units: Manufacturer's standard LED lighting including transformers,

insulators, and other components. Make provisions for servicing and concealing

connections to building electrical system.

2.4 POSTS

A. Steel Posts: Fabricate from 0.120-inch- (3.05-mm-) thick, square steel tubing. Include post

caps, fillers, spacers, junction boxes, access panels, and related accessories required for

complete installation. Hot-dip galvanize post assemblies after fabrication to comply with

ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Post Size: 4 inches square.

2. Post Finish: Baked enamel matching sign panel face.

3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.5 PYLON STRUCTURE

A. Base: Provide pylon signs with integral base consisting of channels, angles, plates, or other

fittings. Drill holes in members for anchor-bolt connection.

1. Provide anchor bolts of size required for connecting base to concrete foundations.

B. Internal Frames: Manufacturer's standard internal steel framing system, designed to withstand

wind pressure indicated. Provide welded construction using mitered joints. Cut, drill, and tap

units to receive hardware, bolts, and similar items.

1. Hot-dip galvanize steel framing system after fabrication to comply with

ASTM A 123/A 123M.



2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for

exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or

lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set

into concrete or masonry work.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard post and panel signs of configurations indicated.

1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop

welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of

exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and

contact surfaces.

2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water

penetration.

3. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as

necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and

installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly.

4. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be

inconspicuous.


A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations

in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are

acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to

minimize contrast.

2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or

thicker, over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611.

B. Color Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 integrally colored or electrolytically

deposited color anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, in Macon-Bibb Green applied over a

satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611.

C. Baked-Enamel Finish: Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written

instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.



1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system

complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils,

medium gloss.

2.10 GALVANIZED STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and

other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to

be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply

galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.

1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in steel,

complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's

standard 2-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a

minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written

instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

C. Color-Coated Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with

manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application,

baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, and electrical power are sized and located to

accommodate signs.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Excavation: Excavate for sign foundation to elevations and dimensions indicated. Reconstruct

subgrade that is not firm, undisturbed, or compacted soil, or that is damaged by freezing

temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities by excavating a further

12 inches, backfilling with satisfactory soil, and compacting to original subgrade elevation.

B. Set anchor bolts and other embedded items required for installation of signs. Use templates

furnished by suppliers of items to be attached.



C. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and

complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion

and other defects in appearance.

2. Mechanical Fasteners: Use non-removable mechanical fasteners placed through

predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment

to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION 101426

WM2A Architects Oct. 20, 2016 11 68 13 - 1


SECTION 11 68 13

PLAYGROUND

EQUIPMENT

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM A123/A123M (2013) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A135/A135M (2009; R2014) Standard Specification for Electric-

Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe

ASTM A153/A153M (2016) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A500/A500M (2013) Standard Specification for

Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

ASTM A513/A513M (2015) Standard Specification for Electric-

Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing

ASTM B108/B108M (2015) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy

Permanent Mold Castings

ASTM B117 (2011) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

ASTM B179 (2014) Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloys in

Ingot and Molten Forms for Castings from All Casting Processes

ASTM B221 (2014) Standard Specification for Aluminum and

Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

ASTM B221M (2013) Standard Specification for Aluminum and

Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric)



ASTM B26/B26M (2014; E 2015) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

ASTM D1248 (2012) Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics

Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable

ASTM D173/D173M (2003; R 2011; E 2012) Bitumen-Saturated Cotton Fabrics Used in Roofing and Waterproofing

ASTM D2454 (2014) Determining the Effect of

Overbaking on Organic Coatings

ASTM D2794 (1993; R 2010) Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact)

ASTM D3359 (2009; E 2010; R 2010) Measuring Adhesion by Tape

Test

ASTM D3363 (2005; E 2011; R 2011; E 2012) Film Hardness by Pencil Test

ASTM D6112 (2013) Compressive and Flexural Creep and Creep-

Rupture of Plastic Lumber and Shapes

ASTM D822 (2001; R 2006) Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings

ASTM F1487 (2011) Playground Equipment for Public Use

ASTM F2373 (2011) Standard Consumer Safety Performance

Specification for Public Use Play Equipment for Children 6 Months through 23 Months

CONSUMER PRODUCT SAFETY COMMISSION (CPSC)

CPSC Pub No 325 (2010) Handbook for Public Playground Safety

1.1 DEFINITIONS

1.1.1 Age-Appropriate

A term that describes equipment scale to include platform height, fall height and maximum equipment height, that allows safe and successful use by children of a specific chronological age; mental and physical ability; and anthropometric measurement. Maximum equipment height and complexity will not exceed a child's ability in that age group.

1.1.2 Composite Structure

Also "Composite Play Structure; Linked Structure". Two or more play events attached, directly adjacent or functionally linked, to create one integral unit that provides more than one play activity.



1.1.3 Designated Play Surface

Any elevated surface for standing, walking, sitting, or climbing; or a flat surface a minimum 2 inches wide having up to a maximum 30 degree angle from horizontal. In some play events the platform surface will be the same as the designated play surface. However, the terms should not be interchanged as they do not define the same point of measurement in accordance with ASTM F1487.

1.1.4 Guardrail

A device around an elevated surface that prevents inadvertent falls from the elevated surface.

1.1.5 Maximum Equipment Height

The highest point on the equipment (i.e., roof ridge, top of support pole).

1.1.6 Play Event

A piece of manufactured playground equipment that supports one or more play activities.

1.1.7 Protective Barrier

An enclosing device around an elevated surface that prevents both inadvertent and deliberate attempts to pass through the device.

1.1.8 Protective Surfacing

Material to be used within the use zone that meets the fall attenuation requirements.

1.1.9 Suspended Hazard

Cable, wire, rope or similar devices suspended up to a maximum 7 feet high between play events; or installed up to a maximum 45 degree angle from the ground to the play event.

1.1.10 Use Zone

The area beneath and immediately adjacent to a play structure or equipment that is designated for unrestricted circulation around equipment, and on whose surface it is predicted that a user would land when falling from or exiting the equipment.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.3.1 Child Safety

Provide play events that meet the child safety performance requirements described in CPSC Pub No 325 and ASTM F1487. The requirements include the following: Head and neck entrapment; sharp points, edges, and protrusions; entanglement; pinch, crush, and shear points; suspended hazards; play event access and egress points; play event use zone perimeter; and design criteria. Since ASTM F1487 criteria is defined for the minimum user through the maximum user (2 through 12 years of age), the requirements for the infant or pre-toddler age group are not prescribed.



1.3.4 Equipment Identification

Identify playground equipment with attached and durable label stating the age-group that the equipment is designed to accommodate. Provide permanent WARNING labels and manufacturer's identification labels, ASTM F1487. Submit a list to include part numbers of furnished play event and equipment materials and components.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings

Shop Drawings

SD-03 Product Data Equipment Equipment Identification Spare Parts

SD-04 Samples

Color

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5.1 Manufacturer Qualification

Play events and equipment similar to those furnished shall have been installed in a minimum 10 sites and been in successful service for a minimum 5 year calendar period. The manufacturer shall provide a Certificate of Insurance AA rated for a minimum one million dollars covering both product and general liability.

1.5.2 Installer Qualification

The installer shall be certified by the manufacturer for training and experience installing the play events and equipment. Manufacturer's Representative

The manufacturer's certified playground safety inspector or the manufacturer's designated certified playground safety representative shall supervise the installation and adjustment of the play equipment.

1.5.3 Technical Representative

1.5.5 Shop Drawings

Submit scale drawings defining the revised use zone perimeters and play event layout.


Submit a delivery schedule and manufacturer's name at least 10 calendar days prior to the first day of delivery. Inspect playground equipment, upon arrival at the job site, for meeting age-appropriate requirements for the age-group that the equipment is designated to accommodate. Store the materials in a dry, covered area until installed.

1.7 WARRANTY



Furnished play events and equipment shall have a minimum 1 year calendar period warranty.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

Submit two bound copies of the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals containing the Maintenance Instructions and describing the recommended preventive maintenance, inspection frequency and techniques, periodic adjustments, lubricants, and cleaning requirements. Furnish play event and equipment spare parts provided by the manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

Prior to the delivery of materials, submit certificates of compliance attesting that materials meet the specified requirements. Certified copies of the material certificates shall include composition and tests to which the material has been subjected. Basis of design: Landscape Structures or equal.

2.1.1 Metal

Metal components shall have factory-drilled holes and be corrosion resistant. The components shall be free of excess weld and spatter. Components with extra holes not filled by hardware or covered by components shall be rejected.

2.1.1.1 Steel

Steel components shall comply with ASTM A135/A135M, ASTM A500/A500M, or ASTM A513/A513M. Minimum tensile strength shall be 310 Mpa 45,000 psi. Minimum yield point shall be 225 Mpa 33,000 psi.

2.1.1.2 Aluminum

Extruded aluminum components shall be type 6061-T6, 6062-T6, or 6063-T6, and shall conform to ASTM B221M ASTM B221. Minimum tensile strength of extruded aluminum components shall be 39,000 psi, and the minimum yield shall be 36,500 psi. Cast aluminum alloy shall conform to ASTM B179, ASTM B26/B26M, and ASTM B108/B108M.

2.1.1.3 Chain

Chain shall be a minimum size 4/0 and shall be corrosion resistant zinc plated. Polyvinyl chloride coating shall be as specified.

2.1.1.4 Rope Cable

Rope cable shall be composed of strands of steel cable with a polypropylene or Dacron synthetic covering that is UV stabilized. Cable ends shall be capped to prevent fraying.

2.1.1.5 Hardware

Hardware shall be corrosion resistant and consist of the following: aluminum, stainless steel, brass, zinc plated steel, zinc-chromate plated steel, or galvanized steel, ASTM A153/A153M. When secured, the hardware shall require a tool to prevent unauthorized loosening and removal.

2.1.1.6 Rails, Loops, and Hand bars

Rails, loops, and hand bars shall consist of corrosion resistant aluminum, powder-coated steel or galvanized steel. Polyvinyl chloride coating, if provided, shall be as specified.



2.1.1.7 Anchors

Anchors shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Plastic Components 2.1.2.1 Panels

Plastic panels shall be molded of ultraviolet (UV) and color stabilized polyethylene or nylon with a minimum 3/16 inch thickness, ASTM F1487. Edges shall be a minimum 3/16 inch radius.

2.1.2.2 Window

Plastic windows shall be flat or molded into a bubble shape, consisting of clear polycarbonate plastic a minimum 3/16 inch thick before forming in accordance with ASTM D1248. Material shall be shatterproof and resistant to crazing, cracking, or fogging.

2.1.4 Recycled Plastic

2.1.4.1 High Density Polyethylene

Mold components of ultraviolet (UV) and color stabilized polyethylene consisting of a minimum 75 percent plastic profile of high-density polyethylene, low-density polyethylene, and polypropylene raw material. The material shall be non-toxic, have no discernible contaminates such as paper, foil, or wood, and contain a maximum 3 percent air voids. The material shall be free of splinters, chips, peels, buckling, and cracks and be resistant to deformation from solar heat gain. Material shall have factory-drilled holes. Components with extra holes not filled by hardware or covered by other components will be rejected. The material shall not be painted.

2.1.4.2 Panel

Panels shall be a minimum 1/4 inch thick; exposed edges shall be smoothed, rounded, and free of burrs and points; and the material shall be shatterproof and resistant to fading, cracking, or fogging.

2.1.4.3 Structural Component

Recycled plastic materials will not be used as load bearing structural members. 2.1.4.4 Recycled Plastic Molded As Lumber

2.1.5 Coatings

2.1.5.1 Galvanized

Metal components shall be hot-dipped in zinc after fabrication according to ASTM A123/A123M. Remove tailings and sharp protrusions formed as a result of the hot-dip process; edges shall be burnished.

2.1.5.2 Polyester Powder

Powder-coated surfaces shall receive electrostatic zinc coating prior to painting. Powder coating shall be electrostatically applied and shall be oven cured. Polyester powder shall be in accordance with the following: ASTM D3359 for adhesion; ASTM D173/D173M for flexibility; ASTM D3363 for hardness; ASTM D2794 for impact; ASTM D2454 for overbake resistance; ASTM B117 for salt spray resistance; and ASTM D822 for weatherability.

2.1.5.3 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)

Prime PVC coating with a clear acrylic thermosetting solution. The primed parts shall be preheated prior to dipping. The liquid polyvinyl chloride shall be UV stabilized and mold-resistant. The coated



parts shall be cured. The coating shall be a minimum 0.08 inch thick within a plus or minus 0.020 inch tolerance. The coating shall have an 85 durometer hardness, ASTM D3363. The finish shall be slip-resistant.

2.1.5.4 Concrete

2.1.5.5 Precast Concrete

2.1.5.6 Cast-In Place Concrete

Provide cast-in-place concrete material in conformance with Section 03 30 00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

2.1.6 Wood Sealants

2.1.6.1 Paint

2.1.6.2 Sealants

Seal all applied surfaces from air; sealants containing pesticide are prohibited.

2.1.7 Color

2.2 EQUIPMENT

Submit manufacturer's descriptive data; catalog cuts; references; and the latest edition of ASTM F1487, ASTM F2373 and CPSC Pub No 325. Manufacturer's specifications, handling and storage requirements, installation procedures, and safety data sheets to include the following: bare or painted metal platform and slide bed orientation from the direct sun; warnings; and child safety performance standards. 2.2.1 Configuration

Provide play event configuration, platform height, fall height, and maximum equipment height as indicated. When the configuration varies from the play event shown, submit scale drawings defining the revised configuration. Protective Barrier and Guardrail

Provide protective barriers and guardrails in accordance with paragraph CHILD SAFETY AND ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS. This specification establishes the protective barrier and guardrail requirements for the infant and

pre-toddler age group. 2.2.4.1 Protective Barrier

The protective barrier for pre-toddler, toddler, and pre-school age groups shall be provided on elevation 30 inches above the protective surfacing. The protective barrier for school-age and pre-teen age groups shall be provided on elevated surfaces a minimum 48 inches above the protective surfacing. The protective barrier shall completely surround the elevated surface except for the access or egress route. As infants are not to be placed on an elevated surface, the protective barrier for the infant age group shall be the same as the crawl wall defined in paragraph MEASURING FALL HEIGHT.

2.2.4.2 Guardrail



The guardrail for pre-toddler, toddler, and pre-school age groups shall be provided on elevated surfaces a minimum 20 inches above the protective surfacing. The guardrail for school-age and pre-teen age groups shall be provided on elevated surfaces a minimum 30 inches above the protective surfacing. The guardrail shall completely surround the elevated surface except for the access or egress route. As infants are not to be placed on an elevated surface, the guardrail for the infant age group shall be the same as the crawl wall defined in paragraph MEASURING FALL HEIGHT.

2.2.5 Multiple-Axis (Rotating) Swing

The swivel mechanism shall contain a durable long life bearing to reduce friction and wear. A tire manufactured specifically for a multiple-axis swing shall be provided and shall weigh a maximum 15.8 kg 35 lb. The tire shall be composed of rotationally molded, low density elastomer, and internally reinforced with a steel ring. The tire shall have no openings for insects or water. The multiple-axis swing shall not be confused with the multiple occupancy swing as they are not the same.

2.2.6 Single-Axis (To-Fro) Swing

2.2.6.1 General Requirements

The swing seat shall be molded of high quality rubber or polyurethane with an encapsulated steel reinforcement. The swing seat shall be designed to accommodate one user

2.2.6.2 Full Bucket Swing Seat

A full bucket swing seat is designed to accommodate children up to a maximum 4 years of age; the seat is used by a child with adult assistance. The swing seat shall be constructed of rubber with a tempered steel insert molded inside, shall be double-sided, shall be enclosed by rubber both front and back, and shall include a 360 degree waist enclosure and leg enclosures. Leg enclosures shall be sized to avoid head or neck entrapment. Finish shall be smooth and edges shall be rounded. These swing seats shall not be mixed with other swing seats within a bay.

2.2.7 Spring Rocking Equipment

Spring mechanisms shall conform to the requirements for pinch, crush, and shear points for a maximum 54 kg 120 lb weight limit in accordance with ASTM F1487. Seats shall be designed to accommodate only the intended number of users.

2.2.8 Roofs

Roofs shall contain no designated play surface.

2.2.9 Sliding Poles

Sliding poles shall be a maximum 1.9 inch diameter and a continuous surface with no protruding welds or joints along the sliding area.

2.2.10 Plastic Slide

The slide shall be molded of UV stabilized polyethylene or nylon with minimum of 3/16 inch wall thickness. The edge shall be a minimum 3/16 inch radius, ASTM D1248, Type II, Class A, Grade G4.



2.2.11 Play House or Enclosures

Provide the play house with a shelf at the window. The play house and enclosures will be designed to provide other than direct outside visibility from a minimum 5 feet to all inside corners.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SITE PREPARATION

3.1.1 Finished Grade and Underground Utilities

Submit finished grade, underground utilities, storm-drainage system and irrigation system status; and location of underground utilities and facilities. Verify that finished grades are as indicated; the smooth grading has been completed.

3.1.2 Layout

3.1.2.1 General

The layout of the entire outdoor play area shall be staked before excavation begins. Provide sufficient space between all adjacent play events and individual play events for play activities and circulation. Moving and rotating play events shall be located away from circulation to prevent collisions.

3.1.2.2 Use Zone

The use zone is associated with the following terms; "Clear Area," and "Fall Zone". The use zone shall be free of hard surfaces, objects or obstacles that a child could run into or fall on top of and be injured. Use zone perimeters shall not overlap hard surfaces.

3.1.3 Orientation

Bare or painted metal platforms and slide beds shall be oriented from the direct sun; or shaded to reduce contact burn risk. Play events that require orientation to adjacent play events or to meet visibility requirements shall be properly oriented.

3.1.4 Obstructions Below Ground

When obstructions below ground affect the work, submit shop drawings showing proposed adjustments for approval.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Play events shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown to meet the requirements of paragraph CHILD SAFETY AND ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS.

3.2.1 Play Event Modification

Site modifications of play events affect the coverage provided in paragraph WARRANTY; therefore, play events and equipment shall not be modified without the written approval of the manufacturer. Submit manufacturer's written approval.

3.2.2 Wood Finishes

3.2.3 Plastic Play Events

3.2.4 Footings



The top elevation of play event footings will be installed at the subbase of the protective surfacing. 3.2.5 Multiple-Axis (Rotating) Swing

The multiple-axis (rotating) swing shall be located away from other play events and circulation. It shall not be attached to a composite structure.

3.2.6 Single-Axis (To-Fro) Swing

The single-axis (to-fro) swing shall be located on the perimeter of the outdoor play area. It shall not be attached to a composite structure.

3.2.7 Slide

The required exit region clear area shall be provided in accordance with ASTM F1487.

3.2.8 Chain or Rope Ladder, Climber or Net Climber

A chain or rope ladder; climber; net climber; and similar components shall be installed in the vertical position. Angled or arch positions are not accepted.

3.2.9 Composite Structure

The composite structure use zone perimeter shall be composed of the use zone perimeters of the play events that, when joined together, comprise the composite structure.

3.2.10 Fall Height

3.2.10.1 General

The fall height is defined as the vertical distance between the finished elevation of the designated play surface and the finished elevation of the protective surfacing beneath it. For some play events the fall height and paragraph PLATFORM HEIGHT are the same. For some play events the fall height and maximum equipment height are the same.

3.2.10.2 Measuring Fall Height

EQUIPMENT MEASURING FALL HEIGHT

Composite Structure For a platform surrounded by protective barriers, measure from the platform finished elevation.

For a platform surrounded by guardrails, measure from the guardrail top elevation.

Infant Crawl Area A maximum 24 inch height, measured from the crawl wall or barrier finished elevation.

Playhouse, Nonclimbable Measure from the designated play surface finished elevation.

Spring Rocking Equipment Measure from the seat top elevation.

Stationary Equipment, Climbable Measure from the maximum equipment height finished elevation.



Stationary Equipment, Nonclimbable Measure from the designated play surface finished elevation.

Swing Measure from the bottom of the pivot point.

3.2.11 Signage

For playground areas other than CDC, durable permanent signage shall be provided to identify the age group the equipment is designed to accommodate.

3.3 RESTORATION AND CLEAN UP

When the operation has been completed, clean up and protect the site. Existing areas that have been damaged from the operation shall be restored to original condition at the Contractor's expense.

3.3.1 Clean Up

The site and play events shall be cleaned of all materials associated with the operation. Play events and surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, stains, filings, and other blemishes occurring from shipment and installation. Cleaning methods and agents shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Required labeling shall be undamaged and visible in accordance with paragraph EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION.

3.3.2 Protection

The area shall be protected as required or directed by providing barricades and signage.

3.3.3 Disposal of Materials

Excess and waste material shall be removed and disposed off Macon-Bibb park property.

3.4 CHILD SAFETY AND ACCESSIBILITY EVALUATION

a. When the protective surfacing is installed the play events and protective surfacing shall be

thoroughly inspected and measured to verify the playground meets manufacturer's recommendations, paragraph CHILD SAFETY AND ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS, and paragraph FALL HEIGHT.

b. The play events shall be age appropriate for the age group using them in accordance with

paragraph PLATFORM HEIGHT.

c. Use zone distances shall be measured to determine the area is free of hard surfaces, objects or obstacles.

d. Play events that do not comply shall be reinstalled. Fasteners, anchors, hardware and labels that do not comply shall be replaced. Ensure positive drainage for the area and the lowest elevation of protective surfacing subgrade has been provided. A written report describing the results of the evaluation shall be provided.

e. Submit records of measurements and findings by the certified playground safety inspector.

Submit verification stating that the installed play events and equipment meet manufacturer's recommendations and paragraph CHILD SAFETY AND ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS.

3.5 RE-INSTALLATION

When re-installation is required, accomplish the following: Re-install the product as specified. Provide



new replacement materials supplied by the manufacturer. Material acquisition of replacement parts is the responsibility of the Contractor. Damage caused by the failed installation shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.

-- End of Section --

Freestanding Play

Smart Play

1 197057A Smart Play Motion 2-5 DB

Kids In Motion

1 120871D Airplane 2-Seat (Rec Permalene) DB

1 176473B Pony (Std Permalene) DB

Custom

1 152179A Saddle Spinner DB 12"Height

1 178484A Sheep Seesaw DB

Custom

1 100124D T-Rex (Rec Permalene) DB

Swings

1 221292A 5" Arch Swing Frame

8' Beam Height Only

1 221293A 5" Arch Swing Frame

Additional Bay 8' Beam Height Only

2 177348A Flat Molded Seat

ProGuard Chains for 8' Beam Height

1 176038A Full Bucket Seat


1 218671C Molded Bucket Seat (2-5 yrs) w/Harness


Signs

1 182503A Welcome Sign (LSI Provided)

Ages 2-5 years Direct Bury

PlayBooster®

Slides

1 130798A Double Swirl Slide

48"Dk DB

1 123333A Rollerslide 40"Dk DB

Climbers W/Permalene Handholds

1 176077B Croquet Climber

72"Dk DB

1 152907C Deck Link w/Barriers

Steel end panels 3 Steps

1 122916C Double Wave Climber

16"Dk Difference 48"Dk DB

1 176080A Logo Climber 64"Dk DB

1 176078A Lollipop Climber

48"Dk DB

Enclosures

1 115253A Hole Panel

2 115227A Zoo Panel Above Deck

More Fun

1 111357C Chinning Bar Steel DB

Roofs

1 154884A CoolToppers Single Post DB Only1

Decks

2 122197A 90* Triangular Tenderdeck

1 152911B Curved Transfer Module

Left 40"Dk DB

2 111228A Square Tenderdeck

1 121949A Tri-Deck Kick Plate 8"Rise

Posts

2 111404Q 116"Steel Post DB

5 111404P 124"Steel Post DB

1 111404N 140"Steel Post DB

3 111404M 148"Steel Post DB

1 154883A 265"Steel Post For CoolToppers Single Post Roof

DB

64"Dk

Freestanding Play

Smart Play

1 210739B Smart Play Venti Steel Posts DB1

Sensory Play

1 168099A Cozy Dome DB

Kids In Motion

1 173591A OmniSpin Spinner Surface Mount1

1 186490A We-saw DB Only1

Swings

4 174018A Belt Seat


2 177351A Molded Bucket Seat (5-12 yrs) w/Harness


1 173592A Oodle Swing DB Only1

2 177332A Single Post Swing Frame

8' Beam Height Only

1 177333A Single Post Swing Frame

Additional Bay 8' Beam Height Only

Signs

1 182503C Welcome Sign (LSI Provided)

Ages 5-12 years Direct Bury

WM2A Project #2016-24

WM2A Architects Oct. 20, 2016

129300 - 1

SECTION 12 93 00

SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Bench

2. Tables

3. Trash receptacles

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 Bench RB28-6’

A. Basis of Design Product: Victor Stanley or Equal

B. Frame – Surface Mounted

C. Seat and Back:

1. Material:



129300 - 2

a. Aluminum Sheet: Perforated metal.

2. Seat Height: As indicated.

3. Seat Surface Shape: As indicate.

4. Overall Height: As indicated.

5. Overall Width: 72”

6. Arms: End and Intermediate Arms.

a. Arm Material: Match frame.

b. Straight shape.

2.02 LITTER RECEPTACLES RB-36

A. Basis of Design Products: Victor Stanley or Equal.

B. Receptacles:

1. Receptacle Shape and Form: Round cylinder with opening for depositing trash in lid.

2. Lids and Tops: Matching facing panels secured by cable or chain, hinged, swiveled, or permanently secured.

a. Description: Five units shall have Flat rim ring lid with center opening and one to have Rain bonnet lid.

3. Receptacle Height: As shown.

4. Overall Width: As shown.

5. Inner Container: Rigid plastic container with drain holes; designed to be removable and reusable.

6. Finish: Black enamel.

2.03 TABLES RPR-4

A. Basis of Design Product: Victor Stanley or Equal.

B. Table Construction:

1. Size:



129300 - 3

a. Overall Height: As shown. b. Overall Width: As shown. c. Overall Length: As shown.

2. Finish: Black enamel.

2.04 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated; free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:

1. Rolled or Cold-Finished Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M).

2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

3. Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429/B 429M.

4. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).

B. Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:

1. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2. Steel Pipe: Standard-weight steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, or electric-resistance-welded pipe complying with ASTM A 135/A 135M.

3. Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500/A 500M.

4. Mechanical Tubing: Cold-rolled, electric-resistance-welded carbon or alloy steel tubing complying with ASTM A 513, or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M and complying with dimensional tolerances in ASTM A 500/A 500M; zinc coated internally and externally.

5. Sheet: Commercial steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

6. Perforated Metal: From steel sheet not less than 0.120-inch (3.0-mm) nominal thickness; manufacturer's standard perforation pattern.

C. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Stainless steel commercial quality, tamperproof, vandal and theft resistant.

D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.



129300 - 4

E. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound; resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

F. Galvanizing: Where indicated for steel and iron components, provide the following protective zinc coating applied to components after fabrication:

1. Zinc-Coated Tubing: External, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of 0.9 oz./sq. ft. (0.27 kg/sq. m) of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, polymer film. Internal, same as external or consisting of 81 percent zinc pigmented coating, not less than 0.3 mil (0.0076 mm) thick.

2. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: According to ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, or ASTM A 924/A 924M.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and angles. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.

B. Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with full-length, full-penetration welds and hollow members with full-circumference welds. At exposed connections, finish surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness or unevenness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

C. Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.

D. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs, barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.

E. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.



129300 - 5

2.06 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.07 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

2.08 IRON FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

2.09 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

1. Run directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

2. Directional Satin Finish: No 4.

3. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



129300 - 6



A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed.

C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings.

D. Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.

E. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core-drill holes for installing posts in concrete to depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and 3/4 inch (19 mm) larger than OD of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.

END OF SECTION 12 93 00



SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Basic electrical requirements, which are specifically applicable to all Division 16

Sections, in addition to the requirements of Division 1 - General Requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal data shall be assembled in complete sets and bound in a hard cover

commercial grade 3 ring binder with sheet protectors at the front and back of the

binder. Binders shall have "pockets" inside the front and rear covers and project

labels on the spine and front cover.

B. All submittal data for a trade shall be submitted at one time except as noted herein.

C. The submittal shall include an index sheet listing each tab number and contents.

D. Submittals not conforming to any of the above requirements shall be rejected.

E. Manufacturer's data sheets shall be marked to clearly indicate the manufacturer, model

number, size, color, accessories, required clearances, field connection details, weight

loading, electrical characteristics, capacities, etc. being submitted. Variations from

specifications shall be explained. Submittal preparer's name and telephone number

shall be listed on the index sheet.

F. Review, corrections, or comments made on the submittals do not relieve the

Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the Drawings, Specifications

and Addendums (Contract Documents).

G. Shop drawings and data submittals for materials requiring extra long delivery time

shall be submitted for approval as soon as possible after execution of contract. See

Architectural specification section for additional requirements for submittals.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. All work installed under Division 16 shall conform to the current adopted Edition of

Building/Electrical Codes and their appropriate amendments:



1. NFPA 70 2011 National Electrical Code

2. Life Safety Code, NFPA 101

3. Requirements of the State of Georgia Fire Marshall's Office.

4. GA State Energy Code.

5. Standard Building Code

6. Standard Mechanical Code (Georgia Edition)

7. Standard for Health Care Facilities, NFPA 99

8. National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 72

9. Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems NFPA110

10. Standard for Lightning Protection System NFPA 780

11. Macon-Bibb County Codes

B. Obtain and pay for all permits, and request inspections from all authorities having

jurisdiction, in a timely manner.

C. Materials and Equipment included in Underwriter's Label Service shall bear that label.

Electrical equipment shall be UL approved as installed, and bear the UL label, unless

noted otherwise herein.

D. Where requirements of these specifications differ from specified codes and

ordinances, conform to the more stringent requirements.

1.5 CONTRACTOR GUARANTEE

A. All equipment and materials furnished and all work performed under these

specifications, shall be guaranteed to be free of defective materials and workmanship

for a period of one year (unless a longer period is specified elsewhere) after

Architect's Final Certificate.

1.6 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS

A. Three bound and indexed Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be prepared by

the Contractor and be submitted for approval prior to delivery to operating personnel.

Binders shall be 3-ring commercial grade, complete with inside storage pockets, sheet

protectors, spine and front cover labels.

B. Operating and maintenance manuals shall also comply with Division 1 Section

“Operation and Maintenance Data.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Install work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by project conditions.

Shift or relocate equipment or systems to avoid conflicts with other trades.

Modifications to the work required to accommodate project conditions encountered in

the field shall be made at no additional cost to the contract.



B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project

conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission

of Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

C. Install items so that there are no obstructions (e.g., pipes, conduits, etc.) blocking

service panels of the equipment, or preventing the removal of the equipment.

D. Electrical items are shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

Install at location required to serve intended purpose. Include installation within ten

(10) feet of location shown.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Contractor shall coordinate work so as to avoid conflicts with other work in progress.

B. Work shall progress in a manner that will not interfere with other trades.

1.9 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

A. Where a manufacturer has been listed as being acceptable in the various specification

sections hereinafter for a certain product, it shall be understood that the manufacturer

has been approved as being capable of producing this product. This does not

necessarily constitute approval of his standard product. His product shall still comply

with all of the requirements and standards of this specification and not necessarily his

standard specification, to the extent that it might require special manufacture to meet

the requirement and standards of this specification.

1.10 DRAWINGS

A. General: Both the drawings and specifications shall be considered supplemental to

one another so that materials and labor required by one but not the other shall be

supplied and installed as though specifically called for by both. Where drawings and

specification conflict, Contractor shall conform to the more stringent or costly of the

two requirements.

B. Existing Conditions: It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to visit the site prior to

bidding the project and prior to beginning work to make himself familiar with existing

conditions.

1.11 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Delivery, Storage and Handling: Deliver products to site in factory-fabricated

protective containers, with (where appropriate) factory-installed shipping skids and

lifting lugs. Store in clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction

traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.

B. Prior to Final Construction Review: All materials and equipment shall be cleaned.

Chipped or scraped paint shall be retouched to match.



C. Equipment Painting: Equipment which has been damaged beyond the point of

retouching or has been retouched not to match the original finish shall be repainted in

accordance with the Architectural painting section.

1.12 CLEANING

A. The Contractor shall maintain the site reasonably clean and free of excessive debris

and leftover materials at all times. All trash and debris shall be hauled from the job

site on a daily basis for disposal. Prior to testing and adjusting, equipment shall be

clean and free of any construction debris and litter.

B. Contractor shall meet all contractual requirements as related to site cleanliness

including dust control.

1.13 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTIES

A. Guarantee: All equipment and materials furnished and all work performed under this

section of specifications shall be guaranteed to be free of defective materials and

workmanship for a period of one year (unless a longer period is specified elsewhere)

after final acceptance of the work by the Owner. Warranties: Provide manufacturer's

equipment warranties prior to final inspection. See other paragraphs in other sections

of specifications for specific additional equipment warranties.



1.14 CONTRACTOR REQUESTS FOR ELECTRONIC COPIES OF CAD DRAWINGS

A. If the Contractor requests to obtain electronic copies (emailed files or disc files) of

CAD drawings from Andrews, Hammock & Powell, Inc., (AH&P) this paragraph

shall describe the conditions for this action to take place.

1. The Contractor must obtain written permission from the Architectural client,

that the Architect does not object to providing electronic copies when AH&P is

hired by an Architect to perform Engineering services.

2. If AH&P is prime party (i.e. not hired by an Architect, but hired by the client

directly), Contractor must obtain permission of AH&P to obtain electronic

copies.

3. If approval by Architect or Engineer (as noted above) is obtained, Contractor

may obtain electronic copies based on the following rates: $25 per sheet, with

minimum $200 per project.

4. Contractor shall mail a copy of the check to AH&P, payable to AH&P and shall

sign the enclosed indemnification letter, and send this letter to AH&P, along

with requested sheets. If time is of essence, a copy of the check and

indemnification may be faxed as evidence of the Contractor’s intent to mail

said documents.

5. Upon receiving the check or faxed copy, and signed indemnification letter,

electronic copies of requested sheets shall be provided. AH&P reserves the

right to alter the electronic copies by removing Professional Engineering

Stamp, title block information, company logo, and similar information that is

not relevant to the Contractor’s needs. Contractor shall indicate the desired

format for CAD drawings (DWG or DGN).



WM2A Architects Oct. 20, 2016 26 0501 - 1

SECTION 26 0501 - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Demolition of existing facilities shall consist of, but is not limited to, the removal of

cable and wiring, conduit, fixtures and outlets, and associated abandoned or removed

equipment.

B. Visual Appearance: Demolition shall be accomplished so as to not degrade the visual

appearance and structural soundness of the facility.

C. Surfaces exposed by the removal of equipment and equipment connections shall be

restored to match existing adjacent surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual

Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.

B. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record

documents. Report discrepancies to Engineer before disturbing existing installation.

C. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service

during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or

circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations.

B. Existing Electrical Services: Maintain existing systems in service during construction.

Disable systems only to make connections and change-over to new service. Obtain

permission from Owner at least 14 days before partially or completely disabling any

existing system. Minimize outage duration.

3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of this Section.

B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.

D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible

ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if

conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for

abandoned outlets which are not removed.

F. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension

work.

G. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active.

H. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified.

I. If circuit serves only the device or equipment to be removed, then remove conductors

back to supplying panel and remove all accessible conduit.

J. If circuit serves some devices or equipment to be removed and some devices or

equipment to remain, remove conductors back to nearest junction box or equipment to

remain and rework remaining conductors to maintain power to devices to remain.

Remove accessible conduit to same box or equipment. Plug all openings in box or

equipment.




SECTION 26 0519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Building wire and cable.

B. Wiring connectors and connections.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 26 0500.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. suitable for

purpose specified and shown.


A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

B. All conductors shall be copper.

C. Routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and

cable as required to meet Project Conditions. Include wire and cable lengths within

10 feet of length shown.

D. Where routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing

and lengths required.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Determine required separation between this and other work.

B. Determine routing to avoid interference with other work.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HENRY BURNS PARK WIRE AND CABLE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

B. Conductor: Copper no exceptions. Solid conductor for 10 AWG and smaller,

stranded for 8 AWG and larger.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70; Type XHHW insulation for circuits 6AWG and larger;

Type THHN/THWN insulation for circuits 8 AWG and smaller. At the contractor’s

option, type THHN/THWN insulation may be utilized throughout for all feeders and

branch circuits.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers: Allied, American Insulated, Carol, Pirelli, Rome, Senator,

Southwire or Triangle. Only product of domestic manufacture will be accepted.

2.2 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Solderless Pressure Connectors: 3M Skotch-loks, T & B Freespring or Ideal Wing

Nut for 10 AWG and smaller

B. Compression Connectors: Burndy Hydent, Ilsco or Thomas and Betts Color-Keyed

for 8 AWG and larger.

C. Terminal Lugs: Thomas and Betts STA-KON for 10 AWG and smaller; Thomas and

Betts Color-Keyed for 8 AWG and larger. Equal products as manufactured by

Burndy or Ilsco are acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather and that raceway

systems are complete.

B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire has been completed.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.



3.3 WIRING METHODS

A. Use wiring methods as specified and indicated on Drawings.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.

C. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.

D. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.

E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards using Thomas

and Betts Ty-raps or equal by Panduit or Ideal.

F. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.

G. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no

perceptible temperature rise.

H. Where compression connectors are used for conductor splices and taps; tape

uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation

rating of conductor.

I. Use terminal lugs for connecting all stranded conductors and for all multiple

connections to terminals.


A. Inspect wire for physical damage and proper connection.

B. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with code

recommended values.

C. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Power system grounding.

B. Communication system grounding.

C. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.


A. Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to

underground water pipe and to supplementary grounding electrodes.

B. Provide communications, computer and television distribution system grounding

conductor as shown on Drawings and connect to grounding system.

C. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current

carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding

conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle/device ground connectors.

D. Provide a separate grounding conductor for all circuits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Ground Rods: Copper-encased steel, 3/4 inch diameter, minimum length 10 feet.

B. Conductors: Soft drawn copper conductor as specified in Section 26 0519.

C. Exothermic Connections: Exothermic connections shall be suitable for direct burial

without degradation over the lifetime of the grounding system, Erico "Cadweld" or

equal.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Supplementary Grounding Electrode: Use driven ground rods on exterior of building.

B. Use code, minimum 6 AWG, copper conductor for communications and computer

service grounding conductor. Provide grounding bus bar in Data rooms.

C. Where multiple grounding electrodes are required or where other grounding

electrodes are located within 6 feet each grounding electrode shall be interconnected

below grade using code size bare copper conductor, minimum 6 AWG.

D. All connections below grade shall be made by exothermic process.

E. Screw fasten grounding pigtails to each outlet box and make connection to equipment

grounding conductor.


A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and

proper installation.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical

wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

E. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

F. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover

enclosures, and cabinets.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers


to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Alflex Inc.

3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.

4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

5. Electri-Flex Co.

6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.

7. Maverick Tube Corporation.

8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

9. Wheatland Tube Company.

10. Anaconda

11. Triangle

12. LTV

C. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

D. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

E. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

G. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight) and EMT:

NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application

and environment in which installed.

1. Fittings for EMT: Compression type.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING


the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

3. Arnco Corporation.

4. CANTEX Inc.

5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.

6. Condux International, Inc.



7. ElecSYS, Inc.

8. Electri-Flex Co.

9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.

11. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


the following:

1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. EGS/Appleton Electric.

3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.

4. Hoffman.

5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.

6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

7. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.

9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.

10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.

11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

14. Steel City

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with

gasketed cover. Provided threaded hubs.

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

E. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with

gasketed cover.

2.4 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized

steel, plain ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:



1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.

4. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet

locations.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit.

2. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 3R,

stainless steel in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings,


2. Electrical metal Tubing:

a. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.

b. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; insulated throat steel

compression type. Set screw or indenter type are unacceptable.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.

3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in

Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

C. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions:

Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints.

Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Do not pull wiring into conduit until building is dried-in and conduit systems are

complete.

E. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as

specified herein.

1. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer.

Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of

cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes,

minimum.

F. All conduit shall be routed concealed where possible.



G. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.

H. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers,

clevis hangers, and split hangers.

I. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel

channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.

J. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for

temporary supports

K. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.

L. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.

M. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and

to cast boxes.

N. Provide sealing fittings on all conduit runs which penetrate exterior walls and

refrigerated spaces to prevent circulation of air and/or condensation.

O. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 0533.

P. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 0553.

Q. Where connections to free-standing equipment in excess of 18" from structure are

required, a vertical, minimum size 3/4", rigid conduit secured to ceiling and floor shall

be utilized with wiring into this conduit by means of a rigid connection to a conduit

body and wiring from this conduit by means of a conduit body with a flexible conduit

connection to equipment.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BOXES

A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire

pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.

B. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid

metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box.

C. Use gang box where more than one line voltage device is mounted together. Do not

use sectional box.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit.

2. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work

toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with

expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly



hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength.

After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make

final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal

compaction. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and

equipment, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts

throughout the length of the elbow.

3. Install line warning tape as specified in Division 26 - Identification of Electrical

Systems.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and

cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceway.

2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.

3. Underground-line warning tape.

4. Warning labels and signs.

5. Instruction signs.

6. Equipment identification labels.

7. Miscellaneous identification products.

8. Panelboard directories.

9. Equipment backboards color coding.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and

system components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with

requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring

diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by

codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout

Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and

painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and

doors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Paint conduit striped every ten feet. All junction boxes shall also be painted.

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE

IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils

(0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. For building wire and cables in sizes 8 AWG and smaller provide with factory

insulation to correspond to color code; in sizes 6 AWG and larger provide 3/4"

colored tape bands in lieu of colored insulation.

2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape.

1. Not less than (6 inches) wide by (4 mils) thick.

2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.

3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive

adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to

equipment, unless otherwise indicated.



C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK

HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION -

AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT

CLEAR FOR (36 INCHES)."

2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick

for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Two Layer Acrylic: Adhesive backed, with

black letters on white background

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon

cable ties.

1. Minimum Width: (3/16 inch).

2. Tensile Strength: (50 lb), minimum.

3. Temperature Range: (Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F).

4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9

painting Sections.

C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel

machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Accessible Raceways, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More

Than 30 A: Identify with orange self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following

systems with color-coded, self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands:

Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors

No. 1/0 AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes

use color-coding conductor tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of

conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above.

C. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than

three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape.

Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number.

D. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for

power, lighting, communication, and optical fiber cable.

E. Warning Labels for Irrigation Pedestal, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Bollard

Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply baked-enamel warning signs.

Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior

of door, cover, or other access.

1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.

b. Controls with external control power connections.

2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless

otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush

panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

F. Instruction Signs:

1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation

and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install

instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for

system or equipment operation.

2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend

on a red background with minimum (3/8-inch-) high letters for emergency

instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

G. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique

designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation



and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection

equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets,

and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication,

signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own

identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.

b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.

c. Transformers.

d. Enclosed circuit breakers.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient

viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish

work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using

materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach non-adhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware

appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of

conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

G. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous

underground-line warning tape directly above line at (6 to 8 inches) below finished

grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench

or concrete envelope exceeds (16 inches) overall.

H. For all panelboards, provide neatly typewritten directory of each device usage.

I. Locate directory inside panelboard door.

J. Electrical Equipment Backboards: Medium grey.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 2200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and

less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA:

1. Distribution transformers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions,

minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type

and size of transformer indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,

loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location and size of

each field connection, sound level, voltage, kVA, and rated temperature rise.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single

manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in



C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power

Transformers."




A. Store in a warm, dry location with uniform temperature. Cover ventilating openings to

keep out dust.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast

anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.

2. General Electric Company.

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

4. Square D; Schneider Electric.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or welded.

2. Coil Material: Aluminum

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Cores: One leg per phase.

C. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 1.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out

moisture and air.

2. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.

D. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.



1. Finish Color: Gray.

E. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap

below normal full capacity.

F. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a

maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

G. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels.

2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.

H. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor (Non-Linear) rated shall

comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability

to the degree defined by designated K-factor.

1. Non-linear shielded isolating transformers shall have a maximum hot spot

temperature of 185°C and a minimum K factor of 3.2.

Case temperature shall not exceed 35 degrees C rise above ambient at its warmest point.

I. Basic Impulse Level: 10 KV.

J. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper

grounding strap.

K. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using integral vibration-absorbing mounts.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer,

mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Include transformer connection data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature

requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required

by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 16 Section

"Grounding and Bonding" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5

ohms at location of transformer.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to

manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Division 16 Section

"Electrical Supports."

B. Use flexible conduit for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections

to side panel of enclosure. Under no circumstances shall both primary and secondary

conductors occupy a common conduit.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."


A. Check for damage and tight connections prior to energizing transformer.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical

occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at

secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10

percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load

conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap

settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.




SECTION 26 2410 - SERVICE ENTRANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Underground service entrance.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

B. Section 26 0533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems


A. System Voltage: 120/208 volts, single phase, three wire, 60 Hertz.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METERING EQUIPMENT

A. Metering Equipment: As required by the power utility and as shown on plans.

Contractor shall pay all costs to provide service to the project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Underground: Install service entrances, pad-mounted transformer secondary

connections to park service entrance equipment.

B. Provide 1-1/4 inch conduit from transformer to meter base as required.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Branch circuit panelboards.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Nameplates and directory.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

B. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.

C. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of

Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.

D. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings for equipment and component devices under provisions of

Section 26 0500.

B. Include outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated

short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker arrangement and sizes.

1.5 SPARE PARTS

A. Keys: Furnish 2 each to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB1; circuit breaker type.

B. Enclosure: EXTERIOR GRADE; Multi-section panelboards shall be equal height.



C. Provide surface cabinet front as scheduled, with screw cover and hinged door with flush

lock all keyed alike.

D. Provide panelboards with all aluminum bus, ratings as scheduled on Drawings. Provide

grounding bus in all panelboards.

E. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 208

volt panelboards; unless noted otherwise on Drawings.

F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1; bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit

breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Circuit breakers shall be listed as

suitable for use with 75 degrees C conductor.

G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Square D, Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, or Siemens.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards plumb in conformance with NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Top of Panel Height: Panelboards with box dimensions of 53 inches or less in height

shall be installed with top of panel at 6 ft.-6 in. Panels with box dimensions in excess

of 53 inches in height shall be installed such that the operating handle of the uppermost

device is 72 inches above GRADE.

C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.

D. Provide nameplate and typed circuit directory in accordance with Section 26 0553 for

each panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance

phase loads.


A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference at

any panelboard between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits in the panelboard

to balance the phase loads within 20 percent. Take care to maintain proper phasing for

multi-wire branch circuits.

B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment,

anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for

circuit breakers, and lugs.




SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Receptacles.

B. Device plates and box covers.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 26 0533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

B. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices.

C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions,

colors, and configurations.

1.5 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing

agency specified under regulatory requirements.

B. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation,

operation and installation of product.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable

for purpose specified and shown.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECEPTACLES

A. Manufacturers: Arrow-Hart, Leviton, Hubbell, or Pass and Seymour.

B. Description: NEMA WD 1; heavy-duty specification grade general-use receptacle.

C. Device Body: Gray plastic.

D. GFCI Receptacle: Duplex convenience receptacle as specified herein with integral

ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements.

E. Isolated Ground Receptacle: Type 5-20R, heavy duty, specification grade duplex,

orange plastic body.

2.2 PLATES

A. Decorative Cover Plate: Jumbo oversize, stainless steel type.

B. Exposed Cover Plate: Non-metal type or stainless steel.

C. Provide “In Use” covers per NEC.

D. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Weatherproof coverplates shall be rain-tight while in use.

E. Manufacturer: Hubbell, Leviton, Cooper or Pass and Seymour.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.

B. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.

C. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection

to wiring devices.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide non-metallic extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install devices plumb and level.

C. Install switches with OFF position down.

D. Install duplex receptacles with grounding pole on top. Single outlets shall be installed

with grounding pole on bottom.

E. Do not cascade convenience receptacles on the "load" side of GFCI devices, unless

specifically noted otherwise.

F. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to equipment grounding conductor.

G. Install WEATHERTIGHT plates on receptacle, and outlets in finished areas.

H. Connect wiring devices by wrapping solid conductor around screw terminal or by

means of integral screw tensioned clamp, where applicable. Under no circumstances

is "back wiring" of devices by a spring tensioned means acceptable.

I. Install non-metallic outlet boxes and junction boxes in PARK areas.

J. Install weatherproof plates on outlets exposed to the elements and as noted.

3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533 to obtain

mounting heights specified and indicated on Drawings.

B. Install convenience receptacle 16 inches above GRADE, unless noted otherwise.


A. Inspect each wiring device for defects.

B. Verify that each receptacle device is energized.

C. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.

D. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper operation.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust devices to be flush and level.




SECTION 26 2813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section cartridge fuses rated 600 V and less for use in switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance,

electrical characteristics, and ratings.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses from a single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in



C. Comply with NEMA FU 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40°F or

more than 100°F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse

ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum

fuse size.



1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Fuses: Furnish three of each size and type to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers


to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:

1. Cooper Bussman, Inc.

2. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc.; Cooper Industries, Inc.

3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.

4. Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses

of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.


3.2 FUSES

A. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: ANSI/UL 198E, Class RK1; dual element, current

limiting, time delay, 250 or 600 volt fuse as applicable.

B. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable

without removing fuse.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused

switch. END OF SECTION 26 2813



SECTION 26 5100 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Lighting fixture supports.


1. Section 260533 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/IEEE C62.41 - 1991 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-

Voltage AC Power Circuits.

B. ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High-Intensity Discharge

Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns.

C. ANSI C82.4 - Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps

(Multiple Supply Type).

D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

E. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. CRI: Color-rendering index.

B. CU: Coefficient of utilization.

C. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

D. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

E. RCR: Room cavity ratio.



1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.

2. Ballast.

3. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting

fixture.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include replacement parts list.

D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. FMG Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and

labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FMG.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with

other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC

equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Material Completion for all LED

fixtures.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing

contents.

1. Fixtures: A : One (1) for every 25 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at

least one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements

apply to product selection:

B. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings

that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the

product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the

named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers

specified.

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. LED Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598.

B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage

under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools.

Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from

falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

1. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 BALLASTS

A. Provide lamp type specified for luminaire.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: General Electric, Osram, Sylvania, Venture or Phillips.

2.4 EXIT SIGNS

A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering

size, comply with the current Life Safety Code, NFPA 101.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.



2.5 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Electrical Supports" for channel- and angle-iron

supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

C. Install anchor bolts to secure luminaires in place.

2.6 LED LIGHT FIXTURES

A. General:

B. Bollards - BASIS OF DESIGN: VBR1 Black Domed Round, 360 downlight by Kim

lighting.

1. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on the

drawings, and as specified.

2. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)-

compliant.

3. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load.

b. Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: -20˚ C. (-4˚ F.)

c. Input Voltage: 120 - 277V (±10%) at 60 Hz.

d. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection.

e. Power Factor: ≥ 0.95.

f. Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%.

g. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.

4. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements.

b. Minimum CRI 80 and color temperature 3000˚ K.

c. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with anchor bolts. Install lamps in

each fixture. Secure to prohibit movement.

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."

C. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.



D. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable

for temperature conditions within luminaire.

E. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding

conductor.

F. Install specified lamps in each luminaire.


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper

operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating

and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to

demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.3 ADJUSTING:

A. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps prior to Owner's acceptance.

3.4 CLEANING:

A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.

B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.

C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.


288

LOW

LE

VE

L

VRB1 / VRB2 / VRB3 / VRB4 / VSB1 / VSB2 Vandal Resistant Bollards

Low Level Luminaires

VRB3VRB1 VRB4 VSB1VRB2 VSB2

FEATURES

• VRB1, VRB3 and VSB1 horizontal louvers provide 360° of down-lighting with total lamp source cutoff above 90° horizontal

• VRB2 and VRB4 horizontal louvers provide 210° of cutoff down-lighting and vertical louvers provide 150° of non-cutoff accent lighting

• VSB2 horizontal louvers provide 270° of cutoff down-lighting and vertical louvers provide 90° of non-cutoff accent lighting

• Designed for lighting walkways, entrances, courtyards, and landscaped areas where fixtures are viewable from all directions

• Battery back-up, emergency battery pack and houseside shield options

FIXTUREVRB1 Domed Round,

360° downlighting

VRB2 Domed Round, 210° downlighting, 150° accent lighting

VRB3 Flat Round, 360° downlighting

VRB4 Flat Round, 210° downlighting, 150° accent lighting

VSB1 Square, 360° downlighting

VSB2 Square, 210° downlighting, 150° accent lighting

LUMINAIRE FINISHBL Black

DB Dark Bronze

LG Light Gray

TT Titanium

PS Platinum Silver

WH White

CC Custom Color*

*Consult representative

ELECTRICAL MODULE

HS Houseside Shield

EM Battery Back-up

OPTIONS

ORDERING. INFORMATION (Example)

VRB1 BL10L2K HS

LED

Source10L IES

Type 1 LED

15L IES Type 3 LED

20L IES Type 5 LED

Color Temperature2K Amber3K 3000K4K 4000K5K 5000K

VoltagesUV Universal Voltage

(120 thru 277)

VANDAL RESISTANT BOLLARDMaximum weight: 30 lb

1K"(38 mm)ANCHOR BOLT PROJ.

VRB1 - Single Function Luminaire

BASE PLANVRB ALUMINUM

SHAFT

*30" OR 36" OVERALL HEIGHT AVAILABLE - CONTACT KIM REPRESENTATIVE

(27K" ABSOLUTE MINIMUM)

*30" OR 36" OVERALL HEIGHT AVAILABLE - CONTACT KIM REPRESENTATIVE

(27K" ABSOLUTE MINIMUM)

8" DIA.(203 mm)

5" (127 mm) BOLT CIRCLE DIA.

9"(229 mm)

8" DIA.(203 mm)

42"*(1067 mm)

36"(914 mm)

LIGHTCENTERHEIGHT

6"(152 mm)

3L"(95mm)

CONDUITOPENING

VRB3Single Function

Flat Top

VRB2 - Dual Function Luminaire

9"(229 mm)

8" DIA.(203 mm)

42"*(1067 mm)

36"(914 mm)

LIGHTCENTERHEIGHT

6"(152 mm)

VRB4Dual Fuction

Flat Top



VANDAL RESISTANT SQUARE BOLLARDMaximum weight: 35 lb VSB1 - Single FunctionLuminaire

10"(254 mm)

8" DIA.(203 mm)

43"(1092 mm)

7"(178 mm)

36"(914 mm)

LIGHTCENTERHEIGHT

VSB2 - Dual FunctionLuminaire

8"(203 mm)

5" (127 mm) BOLT CIRCLE DIA.

10"(254 mm) 3C"

(86 mm)CONDUITOPENING

43"(1092 mm)

7"(178 mm)

36"(914 mm)

LIGHTCENTERHEIGHT

BASE PLANVSB ALUMINUM

SHAFT

8" DIA.(203 mm)

CharlesGreen

Oval

CharlesGreen

Oval

CharlesGreen

Oval

CharlesGreen

Oval

CharlesGreen

Oval

CharlesGreen

Oval

CharlesGreen

Oval

Conduit (by others)

��

��

��

��

��

P.O. Box 60080 • 16555 East Gale Ave.City of Industry, California 91716-0080626/968-5666 • FAX 626/330-3861

Leveling Nuts

AnchorBolts

Washers and Nuts

Template

Grade

B30-8R VSB1B30-8S VSB2GEM1 VRB1BNB VRB2

VRB3VRB4

Installation Instructions:1. Dig an adequate hole for anchor bolts. Place leveling nuts onto anchor bolts; follow with washers, template, washers

and nuts. Place assembly in hole.2. Secure anchor bolt assembly in approximate location. Fill hole with concrete (see note below).3. Fixture installation instructions will be supplied with fixture.

Typical InstallationIn Cement

Typical InstallationIn Earth

Revised 7/16/10 ECN 100715008 Status 11 Part No. 95264

Template Orientation:Longitudinal Reference Line

Keep parallel to street or walkway

5” Bolt Diameter

Clear Area For Conduit

(3K” Dia. Ref.)

Template

NOTE: Concrete foundation is to be designed according to local soil conditions (by others). Provide a channelthrough the grout for drainage from the pole interior.

Anchor Bolt Projection

FIXTURE BOLT TEMPLATE ANCHOR MINIMUMCATALOG CIRCLE PART BOLT FOUNDATIONNUMBER DIA. NO. PROJECTION SIZE

B30-8R 5” 96041 1-K” 8” DiameterB30-8S 5” 96041 1-K” 8” Square

VSB1/VSB2 11C” DiagonalVRB1, VRB2 5” 96041 1-K” 8” DiameterVRB3, VRB4

GEM1 / BNB 5” 96041 1-K” 8” Diameter

Anchor Bolt Installation Guide - Bollards

VRB-LED Vandal Resistant Bollard LED Installation Instructions

7/29/14 EC 140731001 Status A Part No. 93054343

Tools Required: q 3/16" Hex Key q 5/32" Hex Key q 7/16" Wrench q 9/16" Open End Wrench q Ratchet 9/16” Deep Socket

Make certain electrical supply is OFF before starting fixture.!

1. Install the base casting on the preset anchor bolts. Use flat washers and hex nuts both below and above the base casting.

2. Level the top edge of the casting by adjusting the bottom leveling nuts. Tighten the upper nuts.

3. Tighten the upper nuts using a 9/16" deep socket

WARNING: Fixtures must be grounded in accordance with local codes or the National Electrical Code. Failure to do so may result in serious personal injury.

NOTE: All wiring must be done by a qualified electrician.

KEEP THIS SHEET FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.

!

5. Pull fixture wires out from inside of riser and make connections to field wires, i.e. green-to-ground, white-to-common and black-to-voltage.

6. Place the pole body over the base cast-ing and slowly turn until it drops into retaining slots. Then, twist clockwise 45 degrees to lock pole onto base casting.

4. To protect finish, lay fixture horizontally on a soft cloth with open end of fixture next to installed base casting.

16555 East Gale Avenue City of Industry, CA 91745-1788 626/968-5666 • FAX 626/968-5716

7. Tighten two 3/8" set screws at the bottom of the pole using a 3/16” hex key.

For Optional Battery BackupDriver assembly and base casting looks like image at right. Connect the circuit ground wire to the green wire connected to the green wire connected to the grounding lug lead on the driver bracket. Connect the power supply leads to the driver input leads, white-to-common and black-to-voltage, black “Un-switched to AC Power” lead to an un-switched AC power source of 100-277V AC.



SECTION 31 1111

SITE CLEARING

1. GENERAL:

1.1 Related Documents:

1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special


1.2 Summary:


1. Protecting existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants and grass to

remain.

2. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants and grass that

interfere with work to be done or are noted to be removed.

3. Clearing and grubbing.

4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.

5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.

6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing and removing site utilities.

7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.

1.3 Definitions:

A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and

sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of

brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay

lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of

subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other non-soil materials.

B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be

protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or

the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 Material Ownership:

A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's

property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be

removed from Project site and disposed of in a legal and lawful manner. Stripped



topsoil shall only be taken off site with the Owner’s express written consent and

only after all site needs are met.

1.5 Submittals:

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees

and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be

misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

B. Record drawings, according to Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents,"

identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface

structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.

1.6 Quality Assurance:

A. Contractor shall verify that all site clearing occurs within the boundary/property

lines, particularly in areas where clearing approaches adjacent common property

lines or noted buffers. Limit clearing to areas noted on the plans and to areas

required for the installation of utilities.

1.7 Project Conditions:

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other

adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or

used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if

required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Provide trained flagmen and install traffic control devices. Operate

warning lights in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and to

warn motorists of construction activity.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: If necessary, Authority for performing

site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained

by Owner.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by

Architect.

C. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and

store onsite where designated, or deliver to the Owner at an offsite location as

directed.

D. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is

located before site clearing. Georgia “Call Before You Dig” Utilities Protection



Center: 1-800-282-7411. The Contractor shall also engage the services of a

local Utility Locator Service firm to identify items within the project site

perimeters that are not identified by the Utility Protection Center. The Bibb

County School System’s Maintenance Department shall also be available to

provide additional locate services if needed. Damages to utilities caused by the

Contractor shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and

sedimentation control measures are in place. Those measures that cannot be

installed prior to site clearing must be installed concurrent with site clearing such

that all cleared areas are fully contained at the end of each day’s activities.

2. PRODUCTS:

2.1 Soil Materials:

A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are

specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil

materials are not available on-site.

3. EXECUTION:

3.1 Preparation:

A. Contractor shall be responsible for all construction layout work.

B. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance

during construction.

C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable

to Owner

E. Provide surface water control during construction operations to direct runoff

water to sediment ponds and barriers and to prevent damage to adjacent

properties.

3.2 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control:

A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil

erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent

properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having



jurisdiction, sediment and erosion control Drawings, and in response to

intermediate construction conditions.

B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during

construction until permanent vegetation has been established. Provide

inspections in accordance with NPDES Permit No. GAR 100001. Maintain

erosion controls on a daily basis.

C. Contractor shall remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and

stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3.3 Tree Protection:

A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before

starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete.

1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within

fenced area.

2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area.

3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash.

B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones,

hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine

spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to

excavation as possible.

1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.

2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are

permanently redirected and covered with soil.

3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with an

emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on

damaged plant tissues.

4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible.

D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by

construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

1. Employ an arborist, licensed in Georgia, to submit details of proposed

repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs.

2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status,

as determined by Architect.



3.4 Utilities:

A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.

B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner

or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements

indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written

permission.

C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

D. Disconnect, demolish, and remove piped utility systems, equipment, and

components indicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be

removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible

piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping

with same or compatible piping material.

3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment.

E. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is

unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new

products of equal capacity and quality.

3.5 Clearing and Grubbing:

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit

installation of new construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or

to be relocated.

2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and

careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of

new construction.

3. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone.

4. Dispose of all vegetation removed in a legal and lawful manner off-site.



B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil

material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8

inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original

ground.

2. After fill placement, grade surface to meet adjacent contours and to pro-

vide surface drainage.

3.6 Topsoil Stripping:

A. Remove sod, grass, brush, roots, wood, glass, stones, broken concrete, brick,

concrete block, etc. before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil, root zones, and cultivated material to whatever depths are

encountered, from building pad and pavement areas and from all other cut and

fill areas.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash,

debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile stripped topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing

with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to

prevent windblown dust.

1. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones.

2. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified in Division 31 Section -

Earthwork.

D. Allow testing company to review topsoil stripping and stockpiling. Stockpile

cleanest topsoil for respreading on landscape and lawn areas.

E. At completion of grading operations, minimum topsoil depth shall be 6 inches at

all landscape areas including: ditches, grass swales, landscape areas and slopes.

Contractor shall stockpile sufficient topsoil to provide the specified minimum

depth. Topsoil may be used on site in fill areas outside of structural areas for

buildings, walks, paving, mechanical/electrical equipment, light pole bases, etc.

at direction of Geotechnical Engineer and with the approval of the Architect.

3.7 Site Improvements:

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as

necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Sawcut and remove all slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as

indicated.



1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly

saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing

pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent

corrosion.

C. Use of explosives will not be permitted.

3.8 Disposal:

A. Disposal: Remove obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials

including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

Burial of debris on-site shall not be allowed. No burning will be allowed.




SECTION 31 2300

EARTHWORK

1. GENERAL:


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special


1.2 Summary:

A. This Section includes the following

1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, parking areas,

driveways, lawns and grasses, and exterior plants.

2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.

3. Floor slab base material for slabs-on-grade and granular backfill.

4. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.

5. Excavating and backfilling pits for buried utility structures.

6. Removing sediment from temporary storage areas.

7. Excavating test pits to determine extent of fill materials, soft surface soils

and rock encountered during the initial subsurface exploration.

8. Spreading and finish grading of topsoil on all site areas including lawn

and landscape areas.


1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for quantity allowance provisions

related to unit-price rock excavation and authorized additional

excavation.

2. Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for unit-price rock excavation and

authorized additional excavation provisions.

3. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary

controls, utilities, and support facilities.

4. Section 31 1111 "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation

control measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling



topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and

utilities.

5. Section 32 9210 "Finishing Lawn and Landscape Areas" for finish

grading, including preparing and placing topsoil and planting soil for

lawns.

6. Section 32 1313 “CONCRETE PAVING, SIDEWALKS, CURB AND

GUTTER" for granular course if placed beneath the CONCRETE.

1.1 Unit Prices:

A. Unit prices for earthwork are included in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices."

B. Quantity allowances for earthwork are included in Division 01 Section

"Allowances."

1.2 Definitions:

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an

excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe to a minimum of 12

inches in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before

laying pipe.

C. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

Offsite borrow areas shall be approved by the Geotechnical firm prior to use.

D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to

lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade

elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by

Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material

will be paid for according to Contract provisions for allowances and unit

prices.

2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 6 feet in width and more than

30 feet in length.

3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or

beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect.

Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect,

shall be without additional compensation.



E. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

F. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits,

and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation (Mass

Rock) or 1 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation (Trench Rock) that

cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in

size and performance ratings:

1. Excavation of Footings and Trenches (Trench Rock): Late-model, track-

mounted hydraulic excavator; having a bucket equipped with rock teeth,

and having a curling force rating of not less than 40,000 pounds;

measured according to SAE J-1179.

a. Trench rock shall consist of rock associated with linear

excavations for storm or utility pipes or footings with a width of

six feet (6’) or less.

2. Bulk Excavation (Mass Rock): Late-model, track-mounted dozer (D8K

or larger or equivalent); pulling a single tooth ripper with a minimum

drawbar pull of not less than 80,000 pounds; measured according to

SAE J-732. Single tooth ripper shall be pulled across the rock surface at

least two times in 8 directions of the compass, for a total of 16 passes.

a. Bulk excavation (mass rock) shall consist of rock associated with

linear excavations that have a width greater than six feet (6’) and

all surface rock encountered that requires removal in order to

achieve finished grades or subgrades.

3. Any material that may be classified as rock shall be evaluated by the

Geotechnical Engineer or his representative during the above noted

classification evaluation and prior to excavation. No claims for payment

of rock excavation will be paid for unless the classification and evaluation

of the material is witnessed and verified by a representative of the

Geotechnical Testing Company and witnessed by a representative of the

Owner and Architect.

G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs,

mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features

constructed above or below the ground surface.

H. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top

surface of a fill or backfill immediately below base, drainage fill, or topsoil

materials.

I. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and

sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of

brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay

lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of

subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.



J. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as

underground services within buildings.

1.3 Submittals:

A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and

interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements

indicated:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow

soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for on-site soil

material proposed for fill and backfill.

B. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining

construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be

misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before

earthwork begins.

C. Photographic documentation of each section of storm drainage taken structure to

structure at time pipe is bedded in stone shall be provided to the Owner prior to

spreading of topsoil.

1.4 Regulatory Requirements:

A. Verify and comply with all Federal, OSHA, State, County, City or local

requirements concerning earthwork, excavation, and related activities.

B. WARNING: NO PERSON(S) SHALL ENTER MANHOLES OR OTHER

UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES, TRENCHES, OR EXCAVATIONS

WITHOUT PROTECTIVE BREATHING APPARATUS AND AT LEAST

ONE OTHER PERSON PRESENT FOR SAFETY AND MONITORING AT

ALL TIMES. CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE

OSHA RULES AND REGULATIONS.


A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency

qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition

testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. Soil tests,

field density tests, and testing of footing subgrades, observation and report of

predensification shall be made by a Geotechnical Testing Agency (Geotechnical

Engineer) and paid for in accordance with Division 01 Section “Quality

Requirements”.

B. Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of

governing authorities having jurisdiction.



1. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavement and other facilities from

damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout,

and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

2. The Contractor, and all sub-contractors, shall be responsible for all safety

measures, procedures, or devices as required by OSHA, Federal, State or

local authorities. No person shall enter a manhole or other underground

structure without protective breathing apparatus, and at least one other

person present for safety. All earthwork, trenching, and grading

operations shall conform to minimum OSHA requirements for safety,

shoring, bracing, and protective measures.

C. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning

lights.

1. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having

jurisdiction.


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner

or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to

provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written

permission.

3. Contact the Georgia Utility Protection Center at 1-800-282-7411 to

acquire a Digging Permit. It is also recommended that the Contractor

also engage the services of a local Utility Locate Service firm to identify

items within the project site perimeters that are not identified by the

Utility Protection Center. The Bibb County School System's

Maintenance Department will also be available to provide additional

locate services upon request. Damages to utilities caused by the

contractor shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the

Owner.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities

indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if

lines are active.



2. PRODUCTS:

2.1 Materials:

A. Satisfactory (suitable) soil materials are limited to soils classified in accordance

with ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, GW, GP, GM, SW,

SP, SM and ML or a combination of these groups; free of non-soil materials and

rock fragments, larger than 3 inches in any dimension. Satisfactory (suitable)

soil materials shall also be free of debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and

other deleterious matter. Satisfactory soils shall have a liquid limit less than 40,

plastic index less than 25 and a Standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM

D-698) greater than 90 pounds per cubic foot.

B. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT

according to ASTM D 2487 or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 3

percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. Rework of

these soils shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

C. Unsuitable soil/materials are soils or materials defined as Soil Classification

Groups OL, CH, MH, OH and PT and/or that are not suitable or appropriate for

their intended use as determined by the Testing Agency or the Engineer of

Record.

D. Base Course: Graded, crushed aggregate base conforming to Georgia

Department of Transportation specifications.

E. Backfill and Fill Materials for Trench Backfill: Satisfactory, suitable soils are

defined in Section 02300 Paragraph 2.1A with the following exceptions:

1. Initial Backfill: Initial backfill shall not contain non-soil and rock

fragments exceeding one inch in any dimension.

2. Final Backfill: Final backfill shall not contain non-soil and rock

fragments exceeding 2 inches in any dimension.

F. Floor Slab Base Material: Floor slab base material shall be #89 crushed stone.

G. Drainage Course: Washed, #57 Stone meeting the Georgia Department of

Transportation Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction Section 800

(latest edition).

2.2 Accessories:

A. Warning/Detection Tape: Tape shall be composed of a solid aluminum foil

encased in a protective plastic jacket. Colors may be solid or striped. Tape shall

be permanently printed with no surface printing allowed. Tape width shall be a

minimum of 3 inches, and shall be buried at a depth between one and two feet



deep. Detection tape shall be installed over all water and sanitary sewer mains,

sanitary service laterals and storm drainage. Tape shall be colored as follows:

1. Blue: Water systems.

2. Green: Sewer systems.

3. Green: Storm Sewer Systems.

B. Tracer Wire: Buried water, sewer and electrical utility lines shall also have a

tracer wire placed in the trench or excavation during backfill at a minimum of six

(6) inches deep.

3. EXECUTION:

3.1 Preparation:

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from

damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and

other hazards created by earthwork operations.

B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of

vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground

surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing."

C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in

Division 31 Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations.

3.2 Shoring and Bracing:

A. Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes

and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not

possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated.

B. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of

backfilling.

C. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet

piling, uprights, stringers and cross-braces, in good serviceable condition.

D. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes

and authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period

excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation

progresses.



3.3 Dewatering:

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding

on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout and damage by rain or

water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow

water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as

temporary drainage ditches.

2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground

water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer

required.

C. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off

areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions

outside excavation limits for each structure. Construct temporary drainage

ditches to divert groundwater and subsurface water away from building and

paving areas. Do not use footing excavations as temporary drainage ditches. Do

not permit construction drainage onto adjacent property.

3.4 Explosives:

A. There shall be no explosives used on this project site.

3.5. Excavation, General:

A. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be

excavated will be classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has

been classified and cross sectioned by the Geotechnical Engineer. The Contract

Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to the provisions of the

Contract.

1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible

on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to

be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not

classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.

2. Intermittent ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock

excavation is earth excavation.

B. Rock excavation includes removal and off-site disposal of rock. Remove rock to

lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent

construction.



3.6 Excavation for Structures:

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or

minus 0.10 feet. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from

structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services

and other construction, and for inspections.

3.7 Excavation for Walks and Pavements:

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections,

elevations, and subgrades.

3.8 Excavation for Utility Trenches:

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top

of pipe at elevations indicated or below frost line, whichever is deeper.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each

side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to

12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated or

required for safety purposes.

1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit unless pipe is in rock, in

which case excavation shall be 6 inches clear on each side of pipe.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing

and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support

for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of

conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.

1. Allow for bedding courses as required for each item.

a. Sanitary Sewer Bedding – See Details.

b. Storm Drainage – See Details.

c. Provide photographic documentation of all pipe runs, structure to

structure, at time of installation and prior to backfilling with soil.

3.9 Subgrade Inspection, Predensification, Proofrolling and Test Pits:

A. Notify Geotechnical Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade

and when fill areas have been cleared and grubbed and topsoil removed.

B. If Geotechnical Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue

excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.



C. Excavate test pits as directed by Geotechnical Engineer to determine limits of

unsuitable materials and soft, loose soils and areas of potential rock. Excavate

unsuitable materials and unsatisfactory materials as directed by Geotechnical

Engineer.

D. The entire stripped subgrade for building, sidewalks, paving and fill areas shall

be scarified and compacted and then proof-rolled as recommended by the

Geotechnical Engineer. The compaction efforts shall be sufficient to densify the

subgrade of areas to receive fill to a minimum density of 95% in accordance with

ASTM-D-698 for a depth of 12 inches. All at grade areas and cut area subgrades

shall be scarified to a depth of 12 inches and compacted to at least 98% of the

same criteria.

E. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy

pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in

direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.

2. Proof-roll with a fully loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck or other

rubber tired equipment weighing a minimum of 20 tons.

3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping

or rutting, as determined by Geotechnical Engineer, and replace with

compacted backfill or as directed.

F. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain,

accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Geotechnical

Engineer, without additional compensation.

3.10 Unauthorized Excavation:

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending

bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without

altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of

2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as

directed by Architect.

3.11 Storage of Soil Materials:

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without

intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to

prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store

within drip line of trees to remain.



3.12 Backfill:

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing

the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage,

dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.

3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.

4. Removing concrete formwork.

5. Removing trash and debris.

6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.

7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally

supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, ice, vegetation, or other

deleterious matter.

3.13 Utility Trench Backfill:

A. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and

backfilling authorized by the Engineer or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Do not backfill storm drain lines until bedded pipe is photographically

documented.

C. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow or ice.

D. All storm drain trenches shall be backfilled with stone per the details shown on

the Drawings. DO NOT BED OR BACKFILL STORMWATER POND

OUTFLOW STORM SEWER PIPES AND STORM SEWER PIPES WITH A

SLOPE GREATER THAN 5 PERCENT.

E. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated.

Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels

of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

F. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than

1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly

up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to

avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate

backfilling with utilities testing.



G. Backfill voids with satisfactory soils while installing and removing shoring and

bracing.

H. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

I. Install warning/locator tape directly above utilities, one to two feet below

finished grade.

3.14 Soil Fill:

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 5

horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.

2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.

3. Under steps and ramps, use satisfactory soil material.

4. Under building slabs, use satisfactory soil material, to floor slab base

material.

5. Under footings and foundations, use satisfactory soil material.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, ice, vegetation or deleterious

matter.

3.15 Soil Moisture Control:

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil

layer before compaction to within 3 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy,

frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil

material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 1 percent and is too

wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.16 Compaction of Soil Backfills and Fills:

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose

depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more

than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required

elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure to prevent

wedging.



C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum

dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 and not less than the following

percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049 for

soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship.

1. Footings, Utility Trenches, Building and Pavement Structural Fill Zones,

Building Slabs, Steps and Pavements: Compact to at least 98 percent of

the Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density.

2. Lawn or Landscape Areas Outside of Building and Pavement Structural

Fill Zones: Compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material to 95%.

3. Base Material for Building Slab: Compact with mechanical equipment to

consolidate and smooth stone material. Allow testing company to review

completed areas prior to proceeding with construction.

NOTE: Structural Fill Zone for building and pavement areas shall be

defined by the area directly beneath the building and pavement plus

extending a minimum of 10 feet horizontally beyond the limits of each

area and also the area encompassed by a 1 to 1 slope down to residual soils

beginning at the 10 foot point.

3.17 Grading:

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface

changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections,

lines, and elevations indicated, allowing for minimum depth of topsoil. Compact

with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown or

between such points and existing grades.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new

grades.

2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with

required surface tolerances.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent

ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Curbs, Walks, Lawns, and Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

Backfill against curbs and pavement edges flush to provide smooth finish

in areas to grassed. Grade areas to receive sod to allow for 1-1/2 inch

thickness.

2. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when

tested with a 10-foot straightedge.



3.18 Grading of All Lawn and Landscape Areas (Under Division 31 Section "Earthwork"):

A. General: Uniformly grade areas including adjacent transition areas. Smooth

finish surfaces within specified to within plus or minus 0.10' between points

where elevations are shown or between such points and existing grades. Grade

areas adjacent pavement to slope as indicated on the drawings and to prevent

ponding of water or sudden changes of grade.

B. Topsoil Placement:

1. All areas of the site that are graded and are to be landscaped, seeded or

sodded shall have a uniform layer of topsoil spread prior to final grading.

Smooth and compact finished surface with uniform levels between points

where elevations are shown or between such points and existing grades.

Topsoil thickness shall be as follows:

a. Lawn and Landscape Areas around Building: 6 inches of topsoil.

2. Grade elevation of topsoil relative to walks, curbs, paved surfaces, and

drainage structures, manhole tops, valve boxes, etc. to conform to the

following criteria.

a. Sodded Lawn Areas - One and one-half inches below finish grade to

allow for placement of sod.

C. Temporary and Permanent Grassing shall be performed in accordance with

Division 32 Section "Landscape Work."

3.19 Base Course:

A. Place base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, ice, vegetation or

deleterious matter.

B. On prepared subgrade, place base course under pavements as follows:

1. Place base course material over subgrade course under hot-mix asphalt

pavement.

2. Shape base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.

3. Place base course 8 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer,

unless mandated otherwise by Authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Where indicated on the Drawings, place base course that exceeds 8 inches

in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted

layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.

5. Compact base course at optimum moisture content to required grades,

lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 100 percent of

maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.



C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of base course to prevent

lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory

soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to

not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

3.20 Field Quality Control:

A. Quality Control Testing during Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and

approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed.

An experienced geotechnical engineer shall observe the pre-densification of the

building and parking areas. One copy of results of all Compaction Test and

observations of pre-densification shall be submitted to Owner, Architect and

Engineer.

1. Testing company shall perform field density tests in accordance with

ASTM D 2937 (thin-walled tube method), ASTM D 2922 (nuclear

method), or sand cone testing method ASTM D 1556.

2. Pavement Subgrade Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Make at least one

field density test for each one foot lift for every 2,500 sq. ft. of building

subgrade area and 5,000 sq. ft. in pavement subgrade areas.

3. Lawn Areas: Make at least one field density test for each one foot lift for

every 7,500 sq. ft. of subgrade area.

4. Topsoil Thickness: Test topsoil thickness one test per 5,000 sq. ft. of

lawn/landscape area.

B. Footing Subgrades: All footing subgrades shall be examined by an experienced

geotechnical engineer or his representative immediately prior to placement of

reinforcing steel. Auger and penetrometer testing, augmented by hand probing,

shall be performed on all footings in accordance with the following:

1. Auger and penetrometer testing: Minimum of one test for each 25 lineal

feet of footing subgrade.

2. Probe rod testing: Minimum of one test for each spread footing and one

test for each 10 lineal feet of continuous footing.

C. If in opinion of Engineer, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade

or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional

compaction to meet the requirements specified herein. Re-testing of areas shall be

at the Contractor's expense.

3.21 Protection:

A. Protect Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and

erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.



B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially

completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose

compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth required; reshape and

re-compact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished

surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct

surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match

adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent

possible.

3.22 Disposal of Surplus and Waste Materials:

A. Disposal: Remove waste material, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off

Owner's property.

3.23 Insufficient Fill Material:

A. If the quantity or classification of onsite grading material is insufficient to meet

project specifications or requirements for each phase of work, the Contractor

shall obtain the required borrow material from offsite sources. No additional

payment will be made to balance the earthwork or to compensate the Contractor

for furnishing and placing suitable materials obtained from offsite sources.

3.24 Excess Cut Material:

A. If the quantity of grading material is in excess of the quantities necessary to

provide subgrade and finish grade elevations indicated on the drawings for each

phase of work, the excess material shall be disposed of offsite. No additional

payment will be made for offsite disposal.




SECTION 31 2500

EROSION, SILTATION AND DUST CONTROL

1. GENERAL:

1.1 Related Sections:


Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 Scope:

A. This work shall consist of control measures during construction until final

acceptance to control water runoff, erosion, siltation, and unreasonable amounts of

dust. Permanent measures, which will remain in place after completion, are shown

on the plans. Temporary measures are also shown on the plans or required by

notes on the plans or project specifications. Measures to adequately control

erosion and siltation throughout project construction, at different stages of

construction, are required whether or not shown on the plans. This control shall be

accomplished through the use of berms, dikes, sediment basins, sediment barriers,

sediment traps, slope drains, grasses, and other devices.

B. All requirements of complying with NPDES General Permit No. GAR 100001 are

listed in the Drawings and shall be the sole responsibility of General Contractor

including all filing with GA EPD and fees to state and local governments.

1.3 General:

A. Comply with all applicable federal, state (GA Erosion and Sedimentation Control

Act) and local ordinances.

B. In general, the work required to accomplish the planned facilities will be performed

in a way which will minimize even temporary increase in suspended matter or

pollutants in local streams or storm drains.

C. Clearing and grubbing operations shall be so scheduled and performed that grading

operations and permanent erosion control features can follow immediately

thereafter, if the Project conditions permit; otherwise temporary erosion control

measures will be required between successive construction stages, as described in

Division 31 Section "Site Clearing."

D. During construction the Contractor shall maintain careful scheduling and

performance to ensure that land stripped of its natural ground cover is exposed

only in small quantities and for durations not exceeding 14 days. Areas left

exposed for periods greater than 14 days shall be seeded with temporary grass

and/or mulched.



E. The erosion control measures described herein shall be continued until the

permanent drainage facilities have been constructed and until the grass on

planted slopes is sufficiently established to be an effective erosion deterrent.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of erosion control measures

until final stabilization of the site, and the Contractor shall remove and dispose

of erosion control devices after maintenance responsibilities are concluded.

1.4 Sediment Barriers:

A. Temporary sediment barriers shall be installed where shown on the plans or

directed by the Engineer. Sediment barriers shall be fabric fence. Sediment shall

be removed periodically during construction to ensure continued satisfactory

performance as intended.

1.5 Temporary Grassing & Mulching:

A. Where staged construction or other conditions prohibit the completion of the

project in a continuous manner the Contractor shall temporary grass and/or

temporary mulch all areas disturbed.

B. Temporary grass shall consist of sowing a quick growing species of grass suitable

to the area and season. Seeding shall be done in accordance with the Landscape

Work Section and the Drawings.

C. Temporary mulch shall be applied to deter surface erosion. The mulched areas

may be placed on slopes as steep as 2:1 using a tractor to imbed the mulch into the

slope.

1.6 Construction in Stream Beds:

A. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, construction operations in

rivers, streams and impoundments shall be restricted to those areas which must be

entered for the construction of temporary or permanent structures. As soon as

conditions permit, rivers, streams, and impoundments shall be promptly cleared of

all false work, piling which are to be removed, debris, and other obstructions

placed therein or caused by the construction operations. Frequent fording of live

streams with construction equipment will not be permitted; therefore, temporary

bridges or other structures shall be used whenever an appreciable number of stream

crossings are necessary. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer,

mechanized equipment shall not be operated in live streams except as may be

required to construct channel changes and temporary or permanent structures, and

to remove temporary structures.

1.7 Run Off, Erosion and Sedimentation Controls:

A. During construction, route run off through sedimentation barriers, check dams and

sediment basins.



B. The Contractor shall maintain sedimentation devices in functional condition.

Sediment ponds, sediment barriers, sediment traps, and check dams shall be

cleaned out when these devices are at last 60 percent of their capacity. Defective

materials in the barriers and check dams shall be replaced.

C. Silts and deposits removed from control barriers shall be placed in eroded areas,

compacted and stabilized with vegetation.

D. The Contractor shall establish sediment barriers at the toe of slopes under

construction. These barriers may be relocated and reused after permanent slope

stabilization becomes established. As they are relocated, any defective material in

the barrier shall be replaced. In addition, all debris and silt at the previous location

shall be removed.

1.8 Dust Control:

A. Dust shall be controlled by keeping dry areas damp by sprinkling with water, or

other means.

1.9 Erosion Control Blankets:

A. 4:1 – 2:1 Slopes: Use straw fiber blankets sewn between two photo-degradable

nets. Blankets shall be S150 as manufactured by North American Green, Curlex II

as manufactured by American Excelsior Company, or Landlok S2 as manufactured

by SI Geosolutions.

B. Waterways and Swales: Use blankets of curled wood or coconut fiber matrix sewn

between two heavy-weight, UV stabilized nets. Blankets shall be C125 as

manufactured by North American Green, Curlex III as manufactured by American

Excelsior Company, or Landlok C2 as manufactured by SI Geosolutions.




SECTION 32 1313

CONCRETE PAVING, SIDEWALKS & CURB AND GUTTERS

1. GENERAL:



Conditions and Division 01 Specifications, apply to this section.

1.2 Description of Work:

A. Extent of concrete curb and gutters and concrete paving is shown on the drawings.

B. Prepared subgrade is specified in Division 32 Section "Earthwork."

C. Concrete and related materials are specified herein.


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent

than herein specified.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who

complies with ASTM C94 requirements for production facilities.

1.4 Submittals:

A. Furnish samples, manufacturer's product data, test reports, and materials'

certifications as required in referenced sections for concrete.

1.5 Preinstallation Conference:

A. Contractor shall conduct pre-installation conference at project site to comply

with requirements in Division 01 Section “Project Management and

Coordination.”

1.6 Job Conditions:

A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required

for other construction activities.

B. Utilize flagmen, barricades, warning signs and warning lights as required.

2. PRODUCTS:

2.1 Materials:



A. Forms: Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist

movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical

alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects.

1. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as

required.

B. Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface

surface of concrete.

C. Expansion Joint Materials: Recycled rubber one-half inch in thickness.

2.2 Concrete Mix, Design and Testing

A. Design mix to produce normal-weight concrete consisting or Portland cement,

aggregate, air-entraining admixture and water to produce the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength:

a. Pedestrian sidewalks, plazas, courtyards and curb and gutter:

3000 psi

b. Vehicular driveways: 4000 psi

2. Compressive strength shown above is required minimum at 28 days, unless

otherwise noted.

3. Slump Range: 3” to 5”.

4. Air Content: 5% to 8%.

5. Fiber Mesh: 1.5 pounds polypropylene fiber per cubic yard.

6. NO WATER SHALL BE ADDED ON-SITE.

7. Curing compound shall be used on all concrete paving, sidewalks and curb

and gutter. Curing compound shall be 1100-Clear as manufactured by

W.R. Meadows or equal.

2.3 Reinforcement:

A. Shall be as indicated on the drawings.

3. EXECUTION:

3.1 Surface Preparation:

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before

placing concrete.



B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and need for

additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been

corrected and area ready to receive paving.

3.2 Form Construction:

A. Set forms to required grades and lines with gutter pitched to drain in locations

indicated by the grades shown on the plans. Rigidly brace and secure all forms.

Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that

forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances:

1. Top of forms not more than 1/8" in 10'.

2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4" in 10'.

C. Clean forms after each use, and coat with form release agent as often as required to

ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.3 Concrete Placement:

A. Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and

grade. Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at

time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures

until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

B. Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate

concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints. Use only square-

faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to

prevent dislocation of joint devices.

C. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or

partially hardened concrete surfaces.

D. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as

far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2-hour, place a construction joint.

E. Curbs and Gutters: Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter placement

at Contractor's option. If machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix

design and laboratory test results which meet or exceed minimum specified.

Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to required cross-section, lines,

grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not

acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as specified.

3.4 Joints:

A. General: Construct expansion, weakened-plane (contraction), and construction

joints true-to-line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete. Construct

transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated.



B. When joining existing structures, place transverse joints to align with previously

placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Weakened-Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened-plane (contraction)

joints at 15 feet on center. Construct weakened-plane joints for a depth equal to at

least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Tooled Joints: Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving

top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a

jointer.

2. Inserts: Use embedded strips of metal to form weakened-plane joints. Set

strips into plastic concrete and carefully remove strips after concrete has

hardened.

D. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations

when placement operations are stopped for a period of more than 1/2-hour, and at

every third contraction joint.

1. Construct joints as shown or, if not shown, use standard metal keyway-

section forms.

2. Where load transfer-slip dowel devices are used, install so that one end of

each dowel bar is free to move.

E. Expansion Joints: Provide premolded recycled rubber for expansion joints

abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks and other

fixed objects, unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 Concrete Finishing:

A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and

floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible.

Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture.

B. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10' straightedge. Distribute concrete

as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a

continuous smooth finish.

C. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an

edging tool, and round to 1/2" radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool

marks on concrete surface.

D. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form

removal, clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove

and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Architects.

E. All horizontal surfaces shall be given a broom finish as described in this Project

Manual.



F. All vertical surfaces and non-walking surfaces shall be given a rubbed finish as

described in Division 32 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

G. All concrete paving, sidewalks and curb and gutters shall receive concrete curing

compound applied as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.6 Repairs and Protection:

A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect.

B. Allow testing company to drill test cores where directed by Architect, when

necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core

holes in satisfactory pavement areas with Portland cement concrete bonded to

pavement with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from

pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is

permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and

spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Sweep concrete curb and gutter and pressure wash sidewalks to remove stains,

discolorations, dirt and other foreign material just prior to final inspection.



WM2A Architects Oct. 20, 2016 32 18 23.53 - 1

SECTION 32 18 23.53

ASPHALT TENNIS COURT SURFACE COLOR COATING SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Asphalt tennis court surface color coating system. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Sports Builders Association (ASBA).

B. United States Tennis Association (USTA) Rules of Tennis.

C. International Tennis Federation (ITF). 1.4 SUBMITTALS

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, including surface and crack preparation and application instructions.

C. Samples: Submit manufacturer’s color samples of color coating. E. Manufacturer’s Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification that materials comply

with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application.

G. Applicator’s Project References: Submit applicator’s list of successfully completed asphalt tennis court surface color coating system projects, including project name, location, type and quantity of color coating system applied, and date of application.

H. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer regularly engaged, for past 5 years, in manufacture of asphalt tennis

court surface color coating systems of similar type to that specified. 2. United States owned company. 3. Member: ASBA.



4. Manufacturer has surfaces that are classified by the ITF’s (International Tennis Federation) pace classification program.

B. Applicator's Qualifications:

1. Applicator regularly engaged, for past 3 years, in application of tennis court surface color coating systems of similar type to that specified.

2. Employ persons trained for application of tennis court surface color coating systems.


A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Storage and Handling Requirements:

1. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Keep materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging

until application. 3. Store materials in clean, dry area indoors. 4. Store materials out of direct sunlight. 5. Keep materials from freezing. 6. Protect materials during storage, handling, and application to prevent

contamination or damage. 7. Close containers when not in use.

1.7 AMBIENT CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply asphalt tennis court surface color coating system when air or surface temperatures are below 50 degrees F during application or within 24 hours after application.

B. Do not apply asphalt tennis court surface color coating system when rain is expected

during application or within 24 hours after application. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. SportMaster Sport Surfaces, PO Box 2277, 2520 South Campbell Street, Sandusky, Ohio 44870. Toll Free 800-326-1994. Fax 877-825-9226. Website www.sportmaster.net. E-mail [email protected].

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Tennis Court Surface Color Coating System: SportMaster Color Coating System.

B. Crack Sealant: SportMaster “Crack Magic” or equal.

1. 100 percent acrylic emulsion elastomeric crack sealant.

http://www.sportmaster.net/

mailto:[email protected]



2. Seals cracks up to 1/2 inch wide in asphalt pavement. 3. Weight per Gallon at 77 Degrees F: 8.8 lbs., plus or minus 0.5 lbs. 4. Non-Volatile Material: 61 percent, plus or minus 5 percent. 5. Color: [Green] [Neutral] [Red].

C. Crack Filler: SportMaster “Acrylic Crack Patch” or equal.

1. 100 percent acrylic emulsion trowel-grade crack filler. 2. Fills cracks in asphalt pavement up to 1 inch wide. 3. Chemical Characteristics, by Weight, Minimum:

a. Acrylic Emulsion: 10.0 percent. b. Hiding Pigment: 0.2 percent. c. Mineral Inert Fillers: 78.0 percent. d. Film Formers, Additives: 1.8 percent. e. Water: 8.5 percent.

4. Weight per Gallon at 77 Degrees F: 15.2 lbs., plus or minus 1.0 lbs. 5. Non-Volatile Material: 80 percent, plus or minus 5 percent. 6. Color: [Green] [Neutral] [Red].

D. Patch Binder: SportMaster “Acrylic Patch Binder” or equal.

1. 100 percent acrylic emulsion liquid binder. 2. Mix on-site with sand and cement. 3. Levels and repairs low spots and depressions up to 3/4 inch deep in asphalt

pavement. 4. Fills Cracks in Asphalt up to 1” in width.

5. Weight per Gallon at 77 Degrees F: 8.8 lbs., plus or minus 0.5 lbs.

E. Filler Course: SportMaster “Acrylic Resurfacer” or equal. 1. 100 percent acrylic emulsion resurfacer. 2. Mix on-site with silica sand. 3. Apply to asphalt surfaces or previously colored acrylic surfaces in preparation of

color coating system. 4. Chemical Characteristics, by Weight, Minimum:


5. Weight per Gallon at 77 Degrees F: 8.5 lbs., plus or minus 0.5 lbs. 6. Non-Volatile Material: 27.5 percent, plus or minus 5.0 percent. 7. Color: [Black] or [Neutral].

F. Color Coating: SportMaster “ColorPlus System” or equal.

1. 100 percent acrylic emulsion coating. 2. Mix on-site with silica sand and water. 3. Color coats tennis and multipurpose courts. 4. Weight per Gallon at 77 Degrees F: 9.2 lbs., plus or minus 0.5 lbs.

5. Color: Forest Green.

G. Line Markings Primer: SportMaster “Stripe-Rite” or equal.



1. 100 percent acrylic emulsion primer, clear drying. 2. Primes line markings and prevents bleed-under for sharp lines. 3. Chemical Characteristics, by Weight, Nominal:


4. Weight per Gallon at 77 Degrees F: 8.9 lbs., plus or minus 0.5 lbs. 5. Non-Volatile Material: 29 percent, plus or minus 5 percent.

H. Line Paint: SportMaster “Textured Line Paint” or equal.

1. Pigmented, 100 percent acrylic emulsion line paint. 2. Line marking on asphalt tennis courts. 3. Chemical Characteristics, by Weight, Nominal:

a. Acrylic Emulsion: 25.89 percent. b. Pigment: 14.90 percent. c. Mineral Inert Fillers: 13.12 percent. d. Additives: 4.73 percent. e. Water: 41.36 percent.

4. Weight per Gallon at 77 Degrees F: 10.65 lbs., plus or minus 0.75 lbs. 5. Non-Volatile Material: 45.17 percent, plus or minus 5 percent. 6. Color: White.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine asphalt tennis court surfaces to receive color coating system.

B. Verify asphalt tennis courts meet ASBA requirements.

C. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect application or subsequent use.

D. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Protection of In-Place Conditions: Protect adjacent surfaces and landscaping from contact with asphalt tennis court surface color coating system.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Cure new asphalt surfaces a minimum of 14 to 30 days before application of asphalt

tennis court surface color coating system.

D. Remove dirt, dust, debris, oil, grease, vegetation, loose materials, and other surface contaminants which could adversely affect application of asphalt tennis court surface color coating system. Pressure wash entire surface.



E. Repair cracks, depressions, and surface defects in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions before application of filler course and color coating.

F. Level depressions 1/8 inch and deeper with patch binder in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

G. Apply 1 or 2 coats of filler course as required by surface roughness and porosity to

provide smooth underlayment for application of color coating.

H. Ensure surface repairs are flush and smooth to adjoining surfaces. 3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply asphalt tennis court surface color coating system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Mix materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Apply Filler Course and Color Coating with a 50-60 durometer, soft rubber squeegee.

D. Filler Course:

1. Apply 2 coats on new asphalt or existing acrylic surfaces with extensive cracks or low spot repair.

2. Apply 1 coat on existing acrylic surfaces with minimal repairs.

E. Color Coating: Apply a minimum of 2 coats of color coating to prepared surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Allow material drying times in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions before

applying other materials or opening completed surface to foot traffic. 3.4 LINE MARKINGS

A. Lay out tennis court line markings in accordance with USTA Rules of Tennis.

B. Apply line markings primer, after masking tape has been laid, to seal voids between masking tape and tennis court surface to prevent bleed-under when line paint is applied.

C. Apply a minimum of 1 coat of line paint in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Allow a minimum of 24 hours curing time before opening tennis courts for play.

B. Protect applied asphalt tennis court surface color coating system to ensure that, except for normal weathering, coating system will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

WM2A Project #2016-24 Henry Burns Park 2016-24


SECTION 328400 - IRRIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping.

2. Automatic control valves.

3. Automatic drain valves.

4. Miscellaneous piping specialties.

5. Sprinklers.

6. Quick couplers.

7. Controllers.

8. Boxes for automatic control valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Circuit Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves.

Piping is under pressure during flow.

B. Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit-piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure.

C. Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and

including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure.

D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or

for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.


A. Irrigation zone control shall be automatic operation with controller and automatic control

valves.

B. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor

adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards.

Maintain 100 percent irrigation coverage of areas indicated.

C. Delegated Design: Design 100 percent coverage irrigation Retain paragraph below with one of

last two paragraphs above.



D. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping,

valves, and specialties unless otherwise indicated:

1. Irrigation Main Piping: 200 psig.

2. Circuit Piping: 150 psig.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For irrigation systems indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Coordination Drawings: Irrigation systems, drawn to scale, on which components are shown

and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved. Also include

adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

F. Zoning Chart: Show each irrigation zone and its control valve.

G. Controller Timing Schedule: Indicate timing settings for each automatic controller zone.

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinklers, controllers and automatic control valves

to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers that include a Professional Technical Class

member of the American Society of Irrigation Consultants.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and

handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.




A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging

to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Macon Water Authority no fewer than two days in advance of proposed

interruption of water service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without MWA’s written permission.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Spray Sprinklers: Equal to two percent of amount installed for each type and size

indicated, but no fewer than 5 units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Comply with requirements in the piping schedule for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting

materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight, Type E, Grade B.

1. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or

ASTM A 106/A 106M, Standard Weight, seamless-steel pipe with threaded ends.

2. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

3. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface, and female threaded ends.

4. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 40.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466, Schedule 40.

2. PVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464, Schedule 80.

3. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both headpiece and

tailpiece shall be PVC with socket ends.

D. PVC Pipe, Pressure Rated: ASTM D 2241, PVC 1120 compound, SDR 21.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467, Schedule 80.

2. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both headpiece and

tailpiece shall be PVC with socket or threaded ends.



2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick unless otherwise

indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to

ASTM F 656.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping

system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

B. Form: Tube.

C. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch minimum thickness.

D. Color: Black.

2.4 MANUAL VALVES

A. Curb Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:

a. Amcast Industrial Corporation; Lee Brass Company.

b. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).

c. Jones, James Company.

d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

e. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.

f. Red Hed Manufacturing & Supply.

2. Description:

a. Standard: AWWA C800.

b. NPS 1 and Smaller Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

c. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

d. Body Material: Brass or bronze with ball or ground-key plug.

e. End Connections: Matching piping.

f. Stem: With wide-tee head.

B. Curb-Valve Casing:

1. Standard: Similar to AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve casings.

2. Top Section: Telescoping, of length required for depth of burial of curb valve.



3. Barrel: Approximately 3-inch diameter.

4. Plug: With lettering "WATER."

5. Bottom Section: With base of size to fit over valve.

6. Base Support: Concrete collar.

2.5 PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES

A. Water Regulators:


the following:

a. Cash Acme; a division of The Reliance Worldwide Corporation.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

c. Honeywell International Inc.

d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1003.

b. Body Material: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior

lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2

and NPS 3.

c. Pressure Rating: Initial pressure of 150 psig.

d. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and

NPS 3.

3. Capacities and Characteristics:

a. Size: 2” NPS.

b. Design Flow Rate: 5 gpm.

c. Design Inlet Pressure: 100 psig.

d. Design Outlet Pressure Setting: 50 psig.

B. Water Control Valves:


the following:

a. CLA-VAL Automatic Control Valves.

b. Flomatic Corporation.

c. OCV Control Valves.

d. Watts ACV; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

.

2. Description: Pilot-operation, diaphragm-type, single-seated main water control valve.

Include small pilot control valve, restrictor device, specialty fittings, and sensor piping.



a. Main Valve Body: Cast- or ductile-iron body with AWWA C550 or FDA-

approved, interior epoxy coating; or stainless-steel body.

b. Pattern: Globe valve design.

c. Trim: Stainless steel.

d. Pressure Rating: Initial pressure of 150 psig minimum.

e. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.


a. Size: 2” NPS .

b. Design Flow Rate: 50 gpm.

c. Design Inlet Pressure: 100 psig.

d. Design Outlet Pressure Setting: 50 psig.

2.6 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES

A. Plastic, Automatic Control Valves:


the following:

a. Hunter Industries Incorporated.

b. Nelson, L. R. Corporation.

c. Rain Bird Corporation.

d. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division.

e. Weathermatic.

2. Description: Molded-plastic body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual-flow

adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid.

2.7 AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVES

A. Description: Spring-loaded-ball type of corrosion-resistant construction and designed to open

for drainage if line pressure drops below 2-1/2 to 3 psig.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, with bellows or piston-type pressurized

cushioning chamber and in sizes complying with PDI WH 201, Sizes A to F.

2.9 SPRINKLERS

A. General Requirements: Designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated at

available water pressure.

B. Plastic, Pop-up, Gear-Drive Rotary Sprinklers:




the following:





e. Weathermatic.

2. Description:

a. Body Material: ABS.

b. Nozzle: ABS.

c. Retraction Spring: Stainless steel.

d. Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant.


a. Flow: 10 gpm.

b. Pop-up Height: 6 inches aboveground to nozzle.

c. Arc: Full circle.

d. Radius: 42 feet.

e. Inlet: NPS 3/4.

C. Plastic,

D. Plastic, Pop-up Spray Sprinklers:


the following:





e. Weathermatic.

2. Description:

a. Body Material: ABS.

b. Nozzle: ABS.

c. Retraction Spring: Stainless steel.

d. Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant.

e. Pattern: Fixed, with flow adjustment.


a. Nozzle: ABS.

b. Flow: 6 gpm.

c. Pop-up Height: 6 inches aboveground to nozzle.

d. Arc: Full circle.

e. Radius: 15 feet.



f. Inlet: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4.

E. Plastic Shrub Sprinklers:


the following:

a. Buckner; a division of Storm Manufacturing Group Inc.

b. Hunter Industries Incorporated.

c. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division.

d. Weathermatic.

2. Description:

a. Body Material: ABS or other plastic.

b. Pattern: Fixed, with flow adjustment.


a. Configuration: Fixed.

b. Flow: 6 gpm.

c. Arc: Full circle.

d. Radius: 12 feet.

e. Mounting Height: 12 inches aboveground to nozzle.

f. Inlet: NPS 1/2.

2.10 QUICK COUPLERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Hunter Industries Incorporated.

2. Nelson, L. R. Corporation.

3. Rain Bird Corporation.

4. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division.

5. Weathermatic.

B. Application Pressure Regulators: Brass or plastic housing, NPS 3/4, with corrosion-resistant

internal parts; capable of controlling outlet pressure to approximately 20 psig.

C. Filter Units: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts; of size and

capacity required for devices downstream from unit.

D. Air Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts.

E. Vacuum Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts.



2.11 CONTROLLERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Hunter Industries Incorporated.

2. Nelson, L. R. Corporation.

3. Rain Bird Corporation.

4. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Division.

5. Weathermatic.

B. Description:

1. Controller Stations for Automatic Control Valves: Each station is variable from

approximately 5 to 60 minutes. Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each

station.

2. Exterior Control Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 4, weatherproof, with locking cover and

two matching keys; include provision for grounding.

a. Body Material: Enameled-steel sheet metal.

b. Mounting: Freestanding type for concrete base.

3. Control Transformer: 24-V secondary, with primary fuse.

4. Timing Device: Adjustable, 24-hour, 14-day clock, with automatic operations to skip

operation any day in timer period, to operate every other day, or to operate two or more

times daily.

a. Manual or Semiautomatic Operation: Allows this mode without disturbing preset

automatic operation.

b. Nickel-Cadmium Battery and Trickle Charger: Automatically powers timing

device during power outages.

c. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide-varistor type on each station and primary power.

5. Moisture Sensor: Adjustable from one to seven days, to shut off water flow during rain.

6. Wiring: UL 493, Type UF multiconductor, with solid-copper conductors; insulated

cable; suitable for direct burial.

a. Feeder-Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum, between building and controllers.

b. Low-Voltage, Branch-Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between

controllers and automatic control valves; color-coded different from feeder-circuit-

cable jacket color; with jackets of different colors for multiple-cable installation in

same trench.

c. Splicing Materials: Manufacturer's packaged kit consisting of insulating, spring-

type connector or crimped joint and epoxy resin moisture seal; suitable for direct

burial.

7. Concrete Base: Reinforced precast concrete not less than 36 by 24 by 4 inches thick, and

6 inches greater in each direction than overall dimensions of controller. Include opening

for wiring.



2.12 BOXES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES

A. Plastic Boxes:


the following:

a. Armorcast Products Company.

b. Carson Industries LLC.

c. Nationwide Plastics, Inc.

d. NewBasis.

e. Oldcastle, Inc.

f. Orbit Irrigation Products, Inc.

g. USFilter/Plymouth Products, Inc.

2. Description: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for

installing flush with grade.

a. Size: As required for valves and service.

b. Shape: Rectangular.

c. Sidewall Material: PE, ABS, or FRP.

d. Cover Material: PE, ABS, or FRP.

1) Lettering: “IRRIGATION."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 12 inches below finished grades, except 6

inches below subgrade under pavement and slabs.

B. Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone,

graded from 3/4 to 3 inches, to 12 inches below grade. Cover gravel or crushed stone with

sheet of asphalt-saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated material.

C. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following:

1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 36 inches below finished grade, or not less

than 18 inches below average local frost depth, whichever is deeper.

2. Circuit Piping: 12 inches.

3. Drain Piping: 12 inches.

4. Sleeves: 24 inches.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Set stakes to identify locations of proposed irrigation system. Obtain Architect's approval

before excavation.



3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Location and Arrangement: Drawings indicate location and arrangement of piping systems.

Install piping as indicated unless deviations are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping at minimum uniform slope of 0.5 percent down toward drain valves.

C. Install piping free of sags and bends.

D. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

F. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2 or

smaller pipe connection.

G. Install flanges adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2-1/2

or larger pipe connection.

H. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions.

I. Install PVC piping in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg F. Allow joints to cure at

least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 deg F before testing.

J. Install water regulators with shutoff valve and strainer on inlet and pressure gage on outlet.

Install shutoff valve on outlet. Install aboveground or in control-valve boxes.

K. Water Hammer Arresters: Install between connection to building main and circuit valves

aboveground or in control-valve boxes.

L. Install piping in sleeves under parking lots, roadways, and sidewalks.

M. Install sleeves made of Schedule 40 PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

N. Install transition fittings for plastic-to-metal pipe connections according to the following:

1. Underground Piping:

a. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings.

b. NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA transition couplings.

JOINT CONSTRUCTION

O. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

P. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

Q. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:



1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

R. Flanged Joints: Select rubber gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.

Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

S. PVC Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings

according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.

2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number, ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and

socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Underground Curb Valves: Install in curb-valve casings with tops flush with grade.

B. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Install in boxes for automatic control valves or aboveground

between shutoff valves. Install full-size valved bypass.

C. Throttling Valves: Install in underground piping in boxes for automatic control valves.

D. Drain Valves: Install in underground piping in boxes for automatic control valves.

3.5 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed.

B. Install sprinklers at manufacturer's recommended heights.

C. Locate part-circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches from walls and 2

inches from other boundaries unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTY INSTALLATION

A. Install freestanding emitters on pipe riser to mounting height indicated.

B. Install manifold emitter systems with tubing to emitters. Plug unused manifold outlets. Install

emitters on off-ground supports at height indicated.

C. Install multiple-outlet emitter systems with tubing to outlets. Plug unused emitter outlets.

Install outlets on off-ground supports at height indicated.

D. Install drip tubes with direct-attached emitters on ground.



E. Install drip tubes with remote-discharge on ground with outlets on off-ground supports at height

indicated.

F. Install off-ground supports of length required for indicated mounted height of device.

G. Install application pressure regulators in piping near device being protected, and in control-

valve boxes.

H. Install air relief valves and vacuum relief valves in piping, and in control-valve boxes.

3.7 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION-CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Install interior controllers on concrete bases.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install exterior freestanding controllers on precast concrete bases.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

C. Install control cable in same trench as irrigation piping and at least 2 inches below or beside

piping. Provide conductors of size not smaller than recommended by controller manufacturer.

Install cable in separate sleeve under paved areas.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Water

Distribution Piping" for water supply from exterior water service piping, water meters,

protective enclosures, and backflow preventers. Drawings indicate general arrangement of

piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment, valves, and devices to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect wiring between controllers and automatic control valves.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplates and

signs on each automatic controller.

1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator

of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of

hazards and improper operations.




A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate controllers and

automatic control valves to confirm proper system operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

C. Any irrigation product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

3.11 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust settings of controllers.

B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required for

each sprinkler circuit.

C. Adjust sprinklers and devices, except those intended to be mounted aboveground, so they will

be flush with, or not more than 1/2 inch above, finish grade.

3.12 CLEANING

A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices.

3.13 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic control

valves and controllers.

3.14 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

B. Piping in control-valve boxes and aboveground may be joined with flanges or unions instead of

joints indicated.

C. Underground irrigation main piping, NPS 4 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. NPS 3 and NPS 4 ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint

fittings, glands, bolts, and nuts; and gasketed joints.

2. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.



3. SDR 21, PVC, pressure-rated pipe; Schedule 80, PVC socket fittings; and solvent-

cemented joints.

D. Circuit piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.


cemented joints.

E. Circuit piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:



cemented joints.

F. Underground Branches and Offsets at Sprinklers and Devices: Schedule 80, PVC pipe;

threaded PVC fittings; and threaded joints.

1. Option: Plastic swing-joint assemblies, with offsets for flexible joints, manufactured for

this application.

G. Risers to Aboveground Sprinklers and Specialties: Schedule 80, PVC pipe and socket fittings;

and solvent-cemented joints.

H. Drain piping shall be one of the following:

1. SIDR 9, 11.5, or 15, PE, controlled ID pipe; insert fittings for PE pipe; and banded or

fastener joints.


3. SDR 21, 26, or 32.5, PVC, pressure-rated pipe; Schedule 40, PVC socket fittings; and

solvent-cemented joints.

3.15 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Underground, Shutoff-Duty Valves: Use the following:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Curb valve, curb-valve casing, and shutoff rod.

B. Drain Valves:

1. NPS 1/2 and NPS 3/4: Automatic drain valve.

END OF SECTION 328400



SECTION 32 9000

LANDSCAPE WORK

1. GENERAL

B. Description:

1. This section includes provisions for the following items:

a. Preparation of areas to be landscaped

b. Temporary Seeding

c. Permanent Seeding and Sodding

d. Installation of Trees and Shrubs

e. Soil Amendments

C. The Contractor shall design and install a complete lawn irrigation system to irrigate

all selected areas of the site as indicated on the Drawings. Refer to Specification

Section 02541 for requirements.

D. Source Quality Control:

1. General: Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required

by governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape

materials.

2. Do not make substitutions: If specified materials are not obtainable,

submit proof of non-availability to Architect, together with proposal for

use of equivalent material.

3. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer's

certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized

laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the

Association of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable.

E. Submittals:

1. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the

Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections.

2. Plant and Material Certifications and Tests:

b. Manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments

and fertilizer materials.

c. Label data substantiating that planting materials comply with

specified requirements.



d. Test topsoil under direction of Architect. Supply written analysis

stating N, P, and K requirements, organic matter content, and pH

value of soil.

3. Maintenance Instructions: Typewritten instructions recommending

procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscape work

for one full year. Submit prior to expiration of required maintenance

period(s).

F. Delivery, Storage and Handling:

1. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing

weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from

deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site.

2. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed or planted within 24 hours

after harvesting. Protect sod against drying and breaking of rolled strips.

Keep sprigs moist and covered.

3. Trees and Shrubs: Store trees and shrubs in secure area until planting.

Protect from extreme weather.

G. Job Conditions:

1. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in

a manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required.

Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon

by parties concerned.

2. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to growth are encountered, such

as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Architect

before planting.

H. Sequencing and Scheduling:

1. Proceed with, and complete, landscape work as rapidly as portions of site

become available.

2. Areas seeded with temporary grassing, shall be tilled to not less than 6

inches and the soil reconditioned as provided herein prior to establishing

permanent vegetation.

3. Areas outside of the limits specified above shall be completed and

permanent vegetation established as soon as practical.

4. The Contractor shall perform all necessary work including, but not limited

to, rough grading, fine grading, hand raking, fertilizing, pulverizing,

seeding, and mulching to establish temporary and permanent vegetation on

lawn areas disturbed by construction.

2. PRODUCTS:



A. Topsoil: A 4” LAYER OF Topsoil will be respread over areas to be landscaped.

B. Soil Amendments:

1. Lime: Natural dolomitic limestone containing not less than 85 percent of

total carbonates with a minimum of 30 percent magnesium carbonates,

grounds so that not less than 90 percent passes a 10 mesh sieve and not

less than 50 percent passes a 100-mesh sieve. Lime shall be applied at the

rate of 2 tons per acre.

2. Commercial Fertilizer: Complete fertilizer of neutral character with some

elements derived from organic sources and containing the following

percentages of available plant nutrients:

a. For lawns, provide fertilizer with percentage of nitrogen required

to provide not less than 1 pound of actual nitrogen per 1,000 sq. ft.

of lawn area and not less than 4 percent phosphoric acid and 2

percent potassium. Provide nitrogen in a form that will be

available to lawn during initial period of growth; at least 50

percent of nitrogen to be organic form.

b. Fertilizer shall be 10:10:10 and shall be uniformly applied to the

surface of the ground at the rate of 1,000 pounds per acre.

c. For trees and shrubs, provide a controlled release fertilizer in

granular form with a N-P-K of 12-6-6 or approved equal.

C. Grass Materials:

1. General: Grass materials shall conform to the following requirements for

the specified areas.

2. Seed for Lawn and Disturbed Areas:

a. Common Bermuda Grass Seed: Bermuda grass seed shall be

planted at the rate of 40 pounds per acre.

b. Rye Grass: Minimum germination of 85% and a maximum weed

content of 0.5% by weight. Rye grass when required due to

seasonal limitations shall be applied at the rate of 40 pounds per

acre.

3. Mulching Material: Mulching material shall be Wheat Straw, reasonably

free from weeds, foreign matter detrimental to plant life. Mulch material

shall be uniformly spread at the rate of 5,000 pounds per acre.

4. Sod: Provide strongly rooted sod, free of weeds and undesirable native

grasses, and machine cut to pad thickness of ¾ inch (plus or minus ¼

inch), excluding top growth and thatch. Provide only sod capable of

vigorous growth and development when planted (viable, not dormant).



a. Provide sod of uniform pad sizes with maximum 5 percent

deviation in either length or width. Broken pads or pads with

uneven ends will not be acceptable. Sod pads incapable of

supporting their own weight when suspended vertically wit a firm

finger grasp on upper 10 percent of pad will be rejected.

b. Provide sod composed principally of the following: Tift 419

Bermuda Sod.

D. Weed Barrier: Weed Barrier fabric shall be installed in all shrub bed areas. Weed

Barrier shall be 5 oz./sq. yard fabric as manufactured by Dewitt, Fabriscape, or

Rolanka International.

E. Mulch-Landscape Beds: Organic mulch free from deleterious materials and

suitable for top dressing of trees, shrubs, or plants and consisting of the following:

a. Pine Tree Straw free from sticks, trash, foreign matter, etc.

F. Trees and Shrubs: Trees and shrubs shall be free from disease and pests, and shall

comply with the latest edition of the Publication ANSI 2260.1 “American

Standards for Nursery Stock”, by the American Association of Nurserymen.

3. EXECUTION:

A. Preparation, General:

1. Mix specified soil amendments and fertilizers with topsoil at rates

specified. Delay mixing of fertilizer if planting will not follow placing of

planting soil within a few days.

2. For lawns, mix planting soil either prior to planting or apply on surface of

topsoil and mix thoroughly before planting.

a. Mix lime with dry soil prior to mixing of fertilizer.

b. Prevent lime from contacting roots of acid-loving plants.

3. Preparation for planting lawns: Where lawns are to be planted, prepare soil

for lawn planting as follows: Till to a depth of not less than 6 inches.

Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers as specified. Remove high

areas and fill in depressions. Till soil to a homogenous mixture of fine

texture, free of lumps, clods, stones, roots and other extraneous matter.

a. Prior to preparation of planting areas, remove existing grass,

vegetation and turf. Do not turn existing vegetation over into soil

being prepared for lawns.

b. Allow for sod thickness in areas to be sodded.



c. Apply specified commercial fertilizer at rates specified and

thoroughly mix into upper 4 inches of topsoil. Delay application

of fertilizer if lawn planting will not follow within a few days.

d. Prior to applying soil amendments, fine grade lawn areas to

smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll,

rake, and drag lawn areas, remove ridges and fill depressions, as

required to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas which

can be planted immediately after grading. Fine grading shall

include, but not be limited to, pulverizing with a Gill Pulverizer or

equal equipment and shaping with a tractor and box blade and

hand rakes. Remove stones, pebbles, earth clods and etc. larger

than 3/4 inch diameter.

e. Moisten prepared lawn areas before sodding if soil is dry. Water

thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting

lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition.

f. Restore lawn areas to specified condition, if eroded or otherwise

disturbed after fine grading and prior to planting. Mulch seeded

lawn areas with hay applied at the rate of 5,000 pounds per acre.

B. Sodding New Lawns: Refer to Landscaping Plans for areas to be sodded.

1. Lay sod within 24 hours from time of stripping. Do not plant dormant sod

or if ground is frozen.

2. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides

of sod strips; do not overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent

courses. Work from boards to avoid damage to subgrade or sod. Tamp or

roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade. Work sifted soil into minor

cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering of

adjacent grass.

3. Anchor sod on slopes with wood pegs to prevent slippage.

4. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after planting.

C. Planting Trees and Shrubs: Prepare shrub and tree pits as indicated on the

drawings. Place topsoil mixture in pit and place plants to proper height. Backfill

around plants creating saucer. Stake and mulch plants as indicated.

D. Maintenance:

1. Begin maintenance of seeded areas, sod, trees and shrubs immediately

after each area is planted and continue until Substantial Completion. If sod

is not fully established at the time of Substantial Completion, continue

maintenance until an acceptable lawn is established.

2. Maintain all landscape areas not less than 60 days after Substantial

Completion.



3. Maintain all lawn areas and plants by watering, fertilizing, weeding,

mowing, trimming, applying herbicide and other operations such as

rolling, regrading and replanting as required to establish a smooth,

acceptable lawn, free of eroded or bare areas and free of weeds. It is

intended of these specifications to produce a stand of grass that is alive and

growing, without any bare spots larger than one foot. The Contractor shall

repeat all work as necessary to produce a satisfactory stand.

4. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses and lawn-

watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep planted

areas uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm).

a. Water grass at the minimum rate of 1-1/2 inch per week.

5. Mow grass as soon as there is enough top growth to cut with mower set at

specified height for principal species planted. Repeat mowing as required

to maintain specified height without cutting more than 40 percent of the

grass height. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass-leaf growth in

initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades

bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet.

6. Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer to lawn after first mowing and when

grass is dry. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb.

per 1000 sq. ft. of lawn area.

E. Cleanup and Protection: During landscape work, keep pavements clean and work

area in an orderly condition.

1. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape

operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and trespassers.

Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat,

repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed.

F. Inspection and Acceptance: When landscape work is completed, including

maintenance, Architect will, upon request, make an inspection to determine

acceptability.

1. Landscape work may be inspected for acceptance in portions as agreeable

to Architect, provided each portion of work offered for inspection is

complete, including maintenance.

a. When inspected work does not comply with requirements, replace

rejected work and continue specified maintenance until

reinspected by Architect and found to be acceptable.

2. As soon as all work is complete, a final inspection of the work will be

made, provided a written request for such inspection is given to the Owner.

If the work is found to be satisfactory and in accordance with all

requirements of the contract documents, the work will be accepted.



a. Areas that fail to meet qualifications set forth shall be replaced, at

no additional cost to the Owner, until a satisfactory product is

established.




SECTION 32 9210

FINISHING LAWN AND LANDSCAPE AREAS

1. GENERAL:



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this work.

1.2 Description:

A. This section includes provisions for the following items:

1. Fine grading of all areas to be landscaped.

2. Cleanout of sediment filled areas around inlets and in detention ponds.

3. Finish grade at all sidewalks and paved areas.

4. Finish grade at all storm structures, electrical manholes, sanitary

manholes and curbs.

5. Finish grades of swales, berms, landscape islands, and all other yard

areas.

1.3 Quality Control:

A. General: Review plans to familiarize equipment operators, foremen, and

superintendent of requirements for final grading.

B. Visit site to review conditions prior to starting work. Starting work shall mean

that conditions are acceptable as they exist.

1.4 Job Conditions:

A. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities, manholes, water valves,

sanitary cleanouts, and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible

damage. Hand rake and hand excavate, as required.

1.5 Sequencing and Scheduling:

A. Do not begin finish grading operations until conditions allow for permanent

vegetative covers to be planted.

B. Proceed with final grassing and mulching as rapidly as portions of the site are

fine graded.



C. Maintain finish grading and final grassing to prevent washing and rill erosion

until a complete stand of grass is growing and accepted by the Owner.

2. PRODUCTS: Not Used.

3. EXECUTION:

3.1 Preparation, General:

A. Review plans to identify low points, catchment areas, swales, conveyances,

berms, diversions, detention ponds, cut and fill slopes, etc.

B. Review graded site to identify all areas which hold water or store sediment.

C. Review plans to identify all paved areas, utility boxes, manholes, sanitary

cleanouts, storm water cleanouts, valve boxes, utility vaults, etc.

D. Review installed location of each item and check elevations as necessary to

identify each item that needs to be adjusted to grade and coordinate rework of

paving and utilities or mark utility for future grade adjustments.

3.2 Low Points & Catchment Areas:

A. Clean out around each inlet to ensure that sediment build up from construction is

removed and firm ground is exposed.

B. Backfill around all inlets to compensate for removal of sediment and to build up

the grade to allow positive drainage to the inlet.

C. In low points and catchment areas formed by a series of inlets, transition grade

between inlets and at each end of the catchment areas to allow for high points

that break the water to the inlet.

3.3 Swales and Conveyances:

A. Remove all sediment build up from construction from all swales prior to

beginning work.

B. Smooth grade swales and conveyances shown on plans to remove high points

and backfill low points.

C. Swales and conveyances shall be graded to prevent standing water.

D. Swales within catchment areas shall be graded with high points between inlets

as described above.

3.4 Berms and Diversions:

A. Grade berms and diversions to the width and height indicated on the plans.

B. Finish grading of berms and diversions shall include correcting all points



weakened during construction activities by concentrated runoff, construction

traffic, etc.

C. Finish grading of berms and diversions shall include rounding out the tops of

berms to prevent sharp grade transitions which will hamper later maintenance.

3.5 Cut & Fill Slopes:

A. Smooth grade and compact all cut and fill slopes to remove all rill erosions and

washes.

B. Reapply erosion control blankets, as necessary.

3.6 Grading Adjacent Paved Areas

A. Finish grading adjacent paved areas, curbs and walkways shall be subject to the

following criteria:

1. Sodded Areas: Set 1- ½" below.

2. Seeded Areas: Set ½" below.

3.7 Yard Areas:

A. Yard areas shall be graded to avoid any sudden changes in grade, waviness,

moguls, hillocks, low points, etc., unless specifically noted on the plans.

B. All yard areas shall be graded to allow lawn maintenance equipment to freely

operate with "skinning" the ground or jostling and bounding the operator.

3.8 Manholes, Inlets, Vaults, Valve Boxes & Cleanouts:

A. All manholes, inlets, valve boxes and cleanouts shall be set flush with finish

grade unless specifically detailed to protrude above finished grade.

B. Finish grader shall coordinate with installer to correct faulty grades or grade to

top elevations of structures.

C. Water Vaults shall be set above grade to prevent water from entering and

flooding these vaults.

D. Electrical and telecommunications vaults shall be set flush with grade, unless

otherwise indicated on electrical drawings.




SECTION 33 1116

SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION

1. SCOPE:



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 Scope:

A. This section of the Specifications describes products to be incorporated into the

water lines AND CONNNECTIONS TO CITY MAIN. The Contractor shall

furnish all products and perform all labor necessary to fulfill the requirements of

these Specifications. Refer to Drawings for meter and backflow preventer

requirements. Contractor shall pay cost for IRRIGATION meter and connections

to existing mains. Contractor shall furnish and install all backflow preventers per

Macon Water Authority Standards and Requirements and the Drawings.

Contractor shall also have the backflow preventer tested and certified prior to

final inspection.

B. Contractor shall coordinate all connections to water main with Macon Water

Authority.

1.3 Applicable Standards:

A. Supply all products and perform all work in accordance with applicable American

Society for Testing and Material (ASTM), American Water Works Association

(AWWA), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), National Fire Protection

Association (NFPA), National Sanitation Foundation (NSF), or other recognized

standards. Latest revisions of all standards are applicable. If requested by the

Owner, submit evidence that manufacturers have consistently produced products of

satisfactory quality and performance for a period of at least two years.

B. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment

Directory" for fire-service-main products.

1.4 Manufacturers:

A. Whenever a product is identified in the Specifications by reference to

manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade names, catalog numbers, etc., the

Contractor may freely choose from those referenced products which ones he

wishes to provide. Otherwise products shall meet the criteria set forth in the

specifications for each item.

1.5 Warranty:



A. IRRIGATION distribution systems installed by Contractors which are accepted by

the Owner for ownership, operation and maintenance shall be warranted and

guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance that the

completed system is free from all defects due to faulty products or workmanship,

and that the Contractor shall make such corrections as may be necessary by reason

of such defects upon notice by the Owner.

1.6 Construction Drawings:

A. The term construction drawings shall mean drawings, prints, descriptive literature,

test reports, samples, calculations, schedules, material lists and information and

items of similar meaning.

1.7 Submittals Required:

A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, Owner and local water purveyor for

review in accordance with the procedure outlined below, drawings and descriptive

literature for all manufactured or fabricated products. Additional information such

as special drawings, schedules, calculations and curves, shall be provided as

specifically requested by the Engineer and/or Owner.

1.8 Contractor’s Review:

A. The Contractor shall review and check drawings and submittals. He shall indicate

his review by initials and date. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a

minimum of five copies of all submittals. A transmittal form shall accompany each

submittal or group of submittals.

1.10 City Review:

A. All submittals will be reviewed, stamped and dated by the local water purveyor for

compliance with their specifications.

1.11 Drawings for Construction:

A. Drawings or other submittals not bearing the Engineer's review notation shall not

be issued to subcontractors or utilized for construction purposes. The Contractor

shall maintain at the job site a complete set of construction drawings bearing the

Engineer's review.

2. PRODUCTS:

2.1 General:

A. Furnish all pipe, fittings, valves, tapping sleeves and valves, hydrants, and all other

materials required for completion of the work. Furnish materials in accordance

with the following:

2.2 Pipe:



A. 3 INCH AND SMALLER IRRIGATION SUPPLY WATER PIPING: PVC pipe

and fittings shall be IPS gasketed pipe conforming to ASTM D2241, SDR 13.5 (PR

315). Pipe shall be certified in accordance with ANSI/NSF Standard 61 and

Standard 14. Gaskets shall meet ASTM F477.

4. All pipe shall be furnished in lengths of at least 18 feet.

B. 3 INCH AND SMALLER GATE VALVES (GV): Gate valves 3 inches and

smaller shall have bronze body, bronze rising stem, solid wedge and threaded

bronze bonnet in accordance with UL 262 and FMG Approved with 175 psi

working pressure.

D. Gate valves shall be UL listed and FMG Approved and conform to AWWA

standard specification C-509, latest revision for "Ordinary Water Works Service,"

with interior coating complying with AWWA C550.

E. Valve Boxes (VB): All gate valves shall be equipped with valve boxes. Valve

boxes shall comply with AWWA M44 for cast iron valve boxes. Valve boxes shall

be heavy roadway type. The valve boxes shall be cast iron two-piece slip or screw

type with drop covers marked "WATER." The valve boxes shall be adjustable to 6

inches up or down from the nominal required cover over the pipe. Typical valve

box details are shown on the plans.

1. All valve boxes shall be equipped with concrete collar as detailed on the

plans.

2. Provide one operating wrench with stem of length to operate the deepest

buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.

F. Tapping Sleeves and Valves (TS&V): Tapping sleeves shall be of the split

sleeves, stainless steel, mechanical joint type. Valves shall be gate valves

furnished in accordance with the specifications shown above, with flanged

connection to the tapping sleeve and mechanical joint connection to the branch

pipe. The necessary bolts, glands, and gaskets shall be furnished.

I. Water Meters and Backflow Preventers: Refer to Drawings for requirements.

Contractor shall pay all cost for meters and backflow preventers.

3. EXECUTION:

A. Unloading: Furnish equipment and facilities for unloading, handling, distributing

and storing pipe, fittings, valves and accessories. Make equipment available at all

times for use in unloading. Do not drop or dump materials. All materials dropped

or dumped will be subject to rejection without additional justification.

B.



E. Construction Along Highways, Streets and Roadways: Install pipe lines and

accessories along highways, streets and roadways in accordance with the

applicable regulations of the City, and/or the Department of Transportation with

reference to construction operations, safety, traffic control, road maintenance and

repair.

G. Construction Operations: Perform all work along highways, streets and roadways

to least interfere with traffic.

H. Stripping: Where the pipe line is laid along road shoulders, strip and stockpile all

sod, topsoil and other material suitable for shoulder restoration.

I. Trenching, Laying and Backfilling: Do not open the trench any further ahead of

pipe laying operations than is necessary. Backfill and remove excess material

immediately behind laying operations. Complete excavation and backfill for any

portion of the trench in the same day.

J. Shaping: Reshape damaged slopes, side ditches, and ditch lines immediately after

completing backfilling operations. Replace topsoil, sod and any other materials

removed from shoulders.

L. Drainage Structures: Keep all side ditches, culverts, cross drains, and other

drainage structures clear of excavated material and free to drain at all times.

N. Existing Underground Utilities and Obstructions: It is the responsibility of the

Contractor to locate all existing utilities along the path of his construction. The

drawings shall indicate underground utilities or obstructions that are known to

exist. Where these or unforeseen underground utilities are encountered, the

location and alignment of the water main may be changed, upon written approval

of the Engineer and Owner, to avoid interference. The Contractor shall notify

Water Purveyor's Customers of Water outages at least 24 hours in advance.

P. Laying Pipe

1. General: Unless specifically indicated on the plans or called for in the

specifications, water lines shall be constructed with restrained joint fittings

and mechanical joint valves.

2. Field Inspection: All pipe and accessories shall be laid, jointed, tested for

defects and for leakage with pressure and chlorinated in the manner herein

specified in the presence of the Engineer or his authorized representative

and subject to their approval.

Q. Handling Pipe and Accessories

1. Care: Pipe, fittings, valves and other accessories shall be unloaded at the

point of delivery, hauled to and distributed at the site of the project by the

contractor; they shall at all times be handled with care to avoid damage. In

loading and unloading they shall be lifted by hoists or slid or towed on

skid-ways in such a manager as to avoid shock. Under no circumstances



shall they be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways must not be skidded or

rolled against pipe already on the ground.

2. At Site of Work: In distributing the material at the site of the work, each

piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in

the trench and shall be laid on high ground so that it will not be in a

drainage way.

3. Bell Ends, How Faced: Pipe shall be placed on the site of the work

parallel with the trench alignment and with the bell ends facing the

direction in which the work will proceed, unless otherwise directed by the

Engineer.

4. Pipe Kept Clean: The interior of all pipe, fittings and other accessories

shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times.

R. Alignment and Grade

1. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained in the required lines and

grades, with fittings and valves at the required locations, with joints

centered and spigots home, and with all valve stems plumb.

S. Depth of Pipe: The top of the barrel of the pipe shall have a minimum cover of

forty-eight inches. A greater depth of cover is required in certain sections of the

main, such as railroad crossings, valve locations and other sections of special

construction, and within State and Federal highway rights-of-way.

U. Pipe Installation

1. Manner of Hauling Pipe and Accessories: Proper implements, tools and

facilities shall be provided and used by the contractor for the safe and

convenient execution of the work. All pipe, fittings and valves shall be

carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of derrick ropes

or other suitable tools or equipment, in such manner as to prevent damage

to pipe to pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench.

10. Unsuitable Conditions for Laying Pipe: No pipe shall be laid in water, or

when the trench conditions or the weather is unsuitable for such work.

11. Jointing Pipe-Mechanical Joints: The following steps shall be taken in

making mechanical joints:

a. All lumps, blisters and excess coal-tar enamel shall be removed

from socket and spigot of the pipe.

b. Wash socket and plain end with soapy water containing chloride

solution; then slip gland and gasket over plain end. The small side

of gasket and lip gland shall face bell.



c. Paint gasket with soapy solution containing chlorine.

d. Push gasket into position, being sure it is evenly seated in socket.

e. Slide gland into position; insert bolts and run nuts up finger tight.

f. Tighten bolts to uniform tightness with correct ratchet wrench.

The first bolt tightened shall be the bottom bolt, then top. All

other bolts shall be tightened in sequence at 180 degrees apart.

12. Setting Valves, Valve Boxes and Fittings:

a. General: Gate valves and pipe fittings shall be set and jointed to

new pipe in the manner heretofore specified for cleaning, laying

and jointing pipe.

13. Valve Boxes: Cast iron valve boxes shall be firmly supported, and

maintained centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the gate valve, with

box cover.

V. Pressure and Leakage Tests

1. Pressure during Test: Immediately after the pipe has been laid and

backfilled, but prior to the placement of pavement, each valved section of

newly laid pipe shall be subjected to a leakage and pressure test. For any

section being tested the pressure applied shall be such that at the highest

point in the section, the pressure shall be 200 pounds per square inch. Test

shall be conducted as per NFPA-13. Test on fire protection supply shall

be witnessed by Owner and Architect.

5. Leakage: No detectable leakage will be allowed during the pressure

testing.

W. Backfilling, Cleaning Up and Maintaining Surfaces

1. Time of Backfilling: As soon as practicable after the completion of laying

and jointing of the pipe, the trench shall be backfilled, and at not time shall

the completed backfilling of the trench be more than 300 feet behind the

pipe laying.

2.

4. PVC Pipe Location: Install #12 bare copper locator wire approximately 2

feet below finished grade for all PVC pipes installed under this section.

This tracer wire shall be in addition to warning tape specified in Division

32 "Earthwork." Wire shall encircle all valves and be looped up inside

valve boxes to within 6 inches of ground surface.

5. Restoration of Surfaces: The contractor shall replace all curbing,

sidewalks, gutters, shrubbery, fences, sod, and other surfaces disturbed to a

condition equal to that before the work began, furnishing all labor and



materials incidental thereto and complete the work in a manner satisfactory

to the Engineer. Replacement to street base and surface removed to permit

installation of pipe lines shall be provided for elsewhere in these

specifications.

8. Cleaning Up: Surplus pipe line materials, tools, surplus excavated

materials, rubbish, and temporary structures shall be removed by the

contractor and the construction site shall be left clean, to the satisfaction of

the engineer. The line shall be cleaned up immediately after satisfactory

pressure test has been made.




SECTION 33 4116

STORM DRAINAGE

1. GENERAL:




B. Georgia Department of Transportation Specifications and Details, latest edition

or revision.

1.2 Summary:

A. This Section includes gravity-flow, non-pressure storm drainage with the

following components:

1. Cleanouts.

2. Drains.

3. Precast concrete drainage structures.


1. Division 32 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, trenching, and

backfilling requirements.

1.3 Definitions:

A. RCP: Reinforced Concrete Pipe.

B. HDPE: High Density Polyethylene Plastic Pipe/Smooth Interior (and exterior)

Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe.

1.4 Performance Requirements:

A. Gravity-Flow, Drainage Piping: Pipe shall be as specified under Part 2 -

Products.

1.5 Submittals




1. Special pipe fittings.

2. Drains.

1.6 . Delivery, Storage and Handling:

A. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

B. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

C. Handle stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging

instructions.


A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to

facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following

conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according

to requirements indicated:

2. PRODUCTS

2.2 Piping Materials:

A. 12 Inch and Smaller Storm Sewers: Pipe and fittings shall meet all the

requirements of HDPE (Smooth Interior Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe) as per

AASHTO M294. Joints and fittings for HDPE shall be as specified below.

B. 15 Inch and Larger Storm Sewers: Refer to drawings for areas where a specified

type of pipe must be used. Unless a specific type of pipe is called for on the

Drawings, the Contractor shall have the option of installing one of the types of

storm sewers listed below.

1. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP): Reinforced concrete pipe (RCP) shall

meet the requirements of ASTM Designation C-76, Class III and the

latest revisions thereof. Pipe joints shall be either tongue and groove

with mortar joint or "O" ring type joints. Pipe shall meet GA D.O.T.

Specifications and shall be stamped by D.O.T.

*Per ASTM Test Method D2412

d. The pipe and fittings shall be free of foreign inclusions and

visible defects. The ends of the pipe shall be cut squarely and

cleanly so as not to adversely affect joining.

d. The pipe and fittings shall be free of foreign inclusions and

visible defects. All holes of any kind in the corrugation crests or

sidewalls shall be considered unacceptable. The ends of the pipe



shall be cut squarely and cleanly so as not to adversely affect

joining.

e. The nominal size for the pipe and fittings is based on the

nominal inside diameter of the pipe. Corrugated fittings may be

either molded or fabricated by the manufacturer. Fittings

supplied by manufacturers other than the supplier of the pipe

shall not be permitted without the approval of the Project

Engineer.

f. Joints shall be made with watertight couplings with O-ring

gasket.

g. Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM Recommended

Practice D2321 or as specified by the Project Engineer or local

approving agency.

G. Precast Concrete Structures: Precast concrete storm drainage structures shall conform to

the requirements of ASTM C478. Dimensions and reinforcement steel shall be as

shown on the details and as required by ASTM C478. Submit shop drawings of precast

structures for review.

H. Drainage Structures: Drainage structures shall be installed at locations indicated

on the Drawings. Refer to Drawings for details.

2.3 Cleanouts:

A. Cleanouts: Shall be as shown on the plan details for storm sewer with

countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug, and concrete collar.

1. Top-Loading Classification(s): Heavy duty.

2. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: Shall be as shown on the

Drawings.

2.4 Drainage Structures:

A. Standard Precast Concrete Drainage Structures: ASTM C 478, precast,

reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

1. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 6-inch

minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate

base slab or base section with integral floor.

2. Riser Sections: 6-inch minimum thickness, lengths to provide depth

indicated, and diameter provided for piping and deflections as shown on

plans.



3. Top Section: Provide necessary adapters, brick construction, precast

concrete trays and intermediate tops necessary to accommodate inlet tops

as shown on the details.

4. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber.

5. Steps: Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals.

Omit steps if total depth from floor of catch basin to finished grade is

less than 48-inches. Steps shall be as shown in the detail Drawings.

6. Pipe Connections: All pipe connection to precast concrete structures

shall be grouted in place on both interior and exterior with full bed of

grout.

2.5 Stormwater Inlets

A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions

according to details. Curb inlet hoods shall be of "City of Macon" standards,

unless shown otherwise.

E. Area Drains: Shall be as detailed on the Drawings.

2.6 Pipe Outlets:

A. Headwalls: Pre-Cast or Cast-in-place reinforced concrete, with apron and

tapered sides, per details on the plans, or as referenced by Georgia Department of

Transportation Standards.

3. EXECUTION

3.2 Piping Applications:

A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use the following pipe materials

previously specified for each run of pipe. Where a specific type of pipe has not

been identified, the Contractor may freely choose from the available listed

products.

3.3 Piping Installation:

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate

location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and

arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install

piping as indicated.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with

unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install



gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written

instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use

fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into stormwater structure is

indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or

materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in

direction of flow is prohibited.

E. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at slope indicated.

3. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and

ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."

3.4 Pipe Joint Construction:

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join corrugated PE piping according to CPPA 100 and the following:

a. Use silttight couplings for Type 1, silttight joints.

b. Use soiltight couplings for Type 2, soiltight joints.

c. Joints for 42-60" pipe shall be watertight.

2. Join reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete

Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber-gasket joints.

3.6 Drainage Structure Installation:

A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated by each size and type of pipe

specified.

B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated, secure to structure with full bed of

mortar.

3.8 Field Quality Control:

A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other

damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in

place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Defects requiring correction include the following:



a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible

between structures.

b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage

of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping

diameter.

c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.

d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.

e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

2. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections

until defects are within allowances specified.

3. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Contractor shall clean and pump out pipes and provide qualified personnel as

necessary for all inspections by Owner, Architect.

3.9 Cleaning:

A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials.

B. Clean all structures of dirt and superfluous materials.


DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION...WM2A Project # 2016-24 Henry Burns Park WM2A Architects Oct....

Documents

Transcript of DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION...WM2A Project # 2016-24 Henry Burns Park WM2A Architects Oct....